E
INSTRUCTION
MANUAL
The “Software Start Guide” and “Quick Reference Guide” are
provided at end of this manual.
E
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
The EOS REBEL T3i/EOS 600D is a high-performance, digital single-
lens reflex camera featuring a fine-detail CMOS sensor with approx.
18.0 effective megapixels, DIGIC 4, high-precision and high-speed 9-
point AF, approx. 3.7 fps continuous shooting, Live View shooting, and
Full High-Definition (Full HD) movie shooting.
The camera is highly responsive for shooting at anytime, provides many
functions fitted for advanced shooting, and offers many other features.
Refer to This Manual while Using the Camera to Further
Familiarize Yourself with the Camera
With a digital camera, you can immediately view the image you have
captured. While reading this manual, take a few test shots and see how
they come out. You can then better understand the camera.
To avoid botched pictures and accidents, first read the “Safety
Warnings” (p.297, 298) and “Handling Precauons” (p.14, 15).
Testing the Camera Before Use d Liability
After shooting, playback and cheter the images have been
properly recorded. If the cmera mory card is faulty and the
images cannot be recorded or downloaded to a computer, Canon
cannot be held liable for any loss or inconvenience caused.
Copyrights
Copyright laws in your country may prohibit the use of your recorded
images or copyrighted music and images with music in the memory
card for anything other than private enjoyment. Also be aware that
certain public performances, exhibitions, etc., may prohibit photography
even for private enjoyment.
This camera is compatible with SD memory cards, SDHC memory
cards, and SDXC memory cards. This manual will refer to all these
cards as just “card.”
* The camera does not come with a card for recording images.
Please purchase it separately.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
Item Check List
Before starting, check that all the following items have been included
with your camera. If anything is missing, contact your dealer.
Battery Pack
LP-E8
Battery Charger
LC-E8/LC-E8E*
Camera
(with eyecup and body cap)
(with protective cover)
Wide Strap
EW-100DB III
Interfae cab
Stereo AV Cable
AVC-DC400ST
EOS DIGITAL
Solution Disk
(Software CD-ROM)
Software
Instruction
Manual
Camera
Instruction Manual
(this booklet)
(CD-ROM)
* Battery Charger LC-E8 or LC-E8E is provided. (The LC-E8E comes with a
power cord.)
If you purchased a Lens Kit, check that the lens is included.
Depending on the Lens Kit type, the lens instruction manual might also be
included.
Be careful not to lose any of the above items.
Software Instruction Manual
The software Instruction Manuals are included in the CD-ROM as
PDF files. See page 304 for instructions to look up manuals in the
Software Instruction Manual.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
Conventions Used in this Manual
Icons in this Manual
<6>
: Indicates the Main Dial.
<V> <U>
<0>
: Indicates the <S> cross keys.
: Indicates the setting button.
0, 9, 7, 8 : Indicates that the respective function remains
active for 4 sec., 6 sec., 10 sec., or 16 sec.
respectively after you let go of the button.
* In this manual, the icons and markings indicating the camera’s buttons, dials,
and settings correspond to the icons and markings on the camera and on the
LCD monitor.
3 : Indicates a function which can be changed by pressing the
<M> button and changing the setting.
M
: If shown on the upper right of the pae, it indicates that the
function is available only in threatie Zone modes (p.22).
(p.**) : Reference page number mre information.
: Tip or advice for better sng.
: Problem-solving advice
: Warning to prevent shooting problems.
: Supplemental information.
Basic Assumptions
All operations explained in this manual assume that the power switch
has already been set to <1> (p.32).
It is assumed that all the menu settings and Custom Functions are
set to the default.
For explanatory purposes, the instructions show the camera attached
with an EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS II lens.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4
Chapters
For first-time DSLR users, Chapters 1 and 2 explain the camera’s
basic operations and shooting procedures.
2
25
49
73
93
Introduction
Getting Started
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
12
13
15
Basic Shooting and Image Playback
Creative Shooting
Advanced Shooting
123
141
165
189
201
229
235
249
259
301
305
Shooting with the LCD Monitor (Live View Shooting)
Shooting Movies
Handy Features
Wireless Flash Photography
Image Playback
Post-Processing Images
Printing Images
Customizing the Camera
Reference
Software Start Guide
Quick Reference Guide and Instruction Manual Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5
Contents at a Glance
Shooting
Shoot automatically
Shoot continuously
Î p.49 - 63 (Basic Zone modes)
Î p.88 (i Continuous shooting)
Take a picture of yourself in a group Î p.89 (j Self-timer)
Freeze the action
Blur the action
Î p.94 (s Shutter-priority AE)
Blur the background
Î p.56 (CCreative Auto)
Keep the background in sharp focus p.96 (f Aperture-priority AE)
Adjust the image brightness (exposure) .103 (Exposure compensation)
Shoot in low light
Shoot without flash
Î p.50, 90 (D Flash photography)
p.79 (ISO speed setting)
Î p.55 (7 Flash Off)
p.58, 64 (bFlash Off)
Photograph fireworks at night Î p.100 (Bulb exposure)
Shoot while viewing the LCD monitor Î p.124 (ALive View shooting)
Shoot movies
Î p.141 (k Movie shooting)
Image Quality
Shoot with image effects
Î p.81 (Selecting a Picture Style)
matching the subject
Make a large-size print of the picture Î p.76 (73, 83, 1)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6
Take many pictures
Î p.76 (7a, 8a, b, c)
Focusing
Change the point of focus
Shoot a moving subject
Î p.85 (S AF point selection)
Î p.62, 84 (AI Servo AF)
Playback
View the images with the camera Î p.71 (x Playback)
Search for pictures quickly
Î p202 (H Index display)
p.03 (I Image browsing)
Rate images
Î p.206 (Ratings)
Prevent important mages
Î p.222 (K Image protect)
from accidental deletion
Delete unnecessary images
Î p.224 (L Delete)
Auto play images and movies Î p.215 (Slide show)
View the images or movies on a TV set Î p.218 (Video OUT)
Set the LCD monitor brightness Î p.167 (LCD monitor brightness)
Printing
Print pictures easily
Î p.235 (Direct printing)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7
Index to Features
Power
Image Quality
Battery
Image-recording quality Î p.76
• Charging
• Installing/Removing
• Battery check
Î p.26
Picture Style
White balance
Color space
Î p.81
Î p.28
Î p.33
Î p.260
Î p.32
Î p.117
Î p.121
Power outlet
Auto power off
Image enhancement features
• Auto Lighting Optimizer Î p.109
• Lens peripheral
Card
illumination correction
• Noise reduction
for long exposures
• Noise reduction
for high ISO speeds
• Highlight tone priority
Î p.110
Inserting/Removing
Format
Î p.29
Î p.45
Î p.253
Release shutter without
card
Î p.254
Î p.254
Î p.166
Lens
AF
Attaching/Detaching
Zoom
Î p.36
Î p.37
Î p.38
mod
Î p.83
Î p.85
Î p.87
F point selection
Manual focusing
Image Stabilizer
Basic Settings
Drive
Dioptric adjustment
Language
Î p.39
Î p.35
Î p.34
Î p.166
Drive modes
Î p.20
Î p.88
Î p.89
Î p.77
Continuous shooting
Self-timer
Date/Time
Beeper
Maximum burst
Using the LCD monitor Î p.31
Shooting
LCD Off/On
LCD brightness
adjustment
Î p.179
ISO speed
Î p.79
Î p.48
Î p.41
Î p.56
Î p.74
Î p.94
Î p.96
Î p.99
Î p.100
Î p.167
Feature guide
Quick Control
Creative Auto
Program AE
Recording Images
Create/select a folder
File No.
Î p.168
Î p.170
Shutter-priority AE
Aperture-priority AE
Manual exposure
Bulb
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8
Index to Features
Mirror lockup
Automatic Depth-of-field
AE
Î p.122
Image Playback
Image review time
Î p.166
Î p.101
Î p.102
Î p.261
Single image display
• Shooting information
display
Î p.71
Metering mode
Remote control
Î p.226
Î p.202
Index display
Image browsing
(Jump display)
Magnify
Exposure Adjustments
Exposure compensation Î p.103
Î p.203
Î p.204
Î p.205
Î p.206
Î p.212
AEB
Î p.105
Î p.107
AE lock
Rotate
Ratings
Flash
Movie playback
Editing out movie’s
first/last scene
Slie show
Viing images on TV
Protct
Built-in flash
• Flash exposure
compensation
• FE lock
Î p.90
Î p.214
Î p.215
Î p.218
Î p.222
Î p.224
Î p.208
Î p.104
Î p.108
Î p.263
External flash
Flash control
• Wireless flash
Î
Î
Erase
Quick Control
Live View Shooting
Image Editing
Live View shooting
Focusing
Î p.123
Î p.131
Î p.129
Î p.129
Î p.128
Creative filters
Resize
Î p.230
Î p.233
Aspect ratio
Grid display
Quick Control
Printing
PictBridge
Î p.235
Î p.245
Print Order (DPOF)
Shooting Movies
Customization
Movie shooting
Quick Control
Î p.141
Î p.149
Î p.160
Î p.161
Î p.153
Î p.152
Î p.144
Custom Functions (C.Fn)Î p.250
Sound recording
Grid display
My Menu
Î p.258
Software
Video snapshot
Movie digital zoom
Manual exposure
Install
Î p.303
Î p.304
Software Instruction
Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9
Contents
Introduction
2
Item Check List.................................................................................................. 3
Conventions Used in this Manual...................................................................... 4
Chapters............................................................................................................ 5
Contents at a Glance......................................................................................... 6
Index to Features .............................................................................................. 8
Handling Precautions ...................................................................................... 14
Quick Start Guide ............................................................................................ 16
Nomenclature.................................................................................................. 18
Getting Started
25
1
Charging the Battery ....................................................................................... 26
Installing and Removing the Battery................................................................ 28
Installing and Removing the Card ................................................................... 29
Using the LCD Monitor .................................................................................... 31
Turning on the Power ...................................................................................... 32
Setting the Date and Time............................................................................ 34
Selecting the Interface Language............................................................... 35
Attaching and Detaching a Lens ......................................................... 36
About the Lens Image Stabilizer.......................................................... 38
Basic Operation................................................................................ 39
QQuick Control for Shoting Fus........................................................ 41
3 Menu Operations................................................................................. 43
Formatting the Card....................................................................................... 45
Switching the LCD Monitor Display ................................................................. 47
Feature Guide ................................................................................................. 48
Basic Shooting and Image Playback
49
2
A Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto).................................... 50
A Full Auto (Scene Intelligent Auto) Techniques.......................................... 53
7 Disabling Flash.......................................................................................... 55
CCreative Auto Shooting ............................................................................. 56
2 Shooting Portraits....................................................................................... 59
3 Shooting Landscapes................................................................................ 60
4 Shooting Close-ups.................................................................................... 61
5 Shooting Moving Subjects......................................................................... 62
6 Shooting Portraits at Night ......................................................................... 63
QQuick Control............................................................................................. 64
Shoot by Ambience Selection.......................................................................... 65
Shoot by Lighting or Scene Type .................................................................... 68
x Image Playback......................................................................................... 71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10
Contents
Creative Shooting
73
3
d: Program AE................................................................................................74
Setting the Image-recording Quality.................................................................76
Z: Changing the ISO Speed .........................................................................79
A Selecting the Subject’s Optimal Image Characteristics (Picture Style)....81
E: Changing the Autofocus Mode (AF Mode)................................................83
S Selecting the AF Point ...............................................................................85
Subjects Difficult to Focus................................................................................87
MF: Manual Focusing ...................................................................................87
i Continuous Shooting ..................................................................................88
j Using the Self-timer ....................................................................................89
D Using the Built-in Flash ................................................................................90
Advanced Shooting
93
4
s: Action Shots .............................................................................................94
f: Changing the Depth of Field....................................................................96
Depth of Field Preview................................................................................98
a: Manual Exposure................................................................................99
8: Automatic Depth-of-Field A.....................................................101
q Changing the Metering ...............................................................102
O y Setting Exposure Csaton.....................................................103
Auto Exposure Braceting (A...............................................................105
A Locking the Expoure (AE Lock) ..............................................................107
A Locking the Flash Exposure (FE Lock).....................................................108
Correcting the Brightness and Contrast Automatically (Auto Lighting Optimizer).......109
Correcting the Image’s Dark Corners.............................................................110
A Customizing Image Characteristics (Picture Style)................................112
A Registering Preferred Image Characteristics (Picture Style)..................115
B: Matching the Light Source (White Balance) ..........................................117
2 Adjusting the Color Tone for the Light Source..........................................119
Setting the Color Reproduction Range (Color Space) ...................................121
Mirror Lock-up to Reduce Camera Shake......................................................122
Shooting with the LCD Monitor (Live View Shooting)
123
5
AShooting with the LCD Monitor ................................................................124
Shooting Function Settings ............................................................................128
zMenu Function Settings............................................................................129
Changing the Autofocus Mode.......................................................................131
MF: Focusing Manually..................................................................................138
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11
Contents
Shooting Movies
141
6
7
kShooting Movies...................................................................................... 142
Shooting Function Settings ........................................................................... 149
Setting the Movie-recording Size................................................................... 150
Using Movie Digital Zoom.............................................................................. 152
Taking Video Snapshots ............................................................................... 153
Menu Function Settings................................................................................. 157
Handy Features
165
Handy Features............................................................................................. 166
Silencing the Beeper .................................................................................. 166
Card Reminder........................................................................................... 166
Setting the Image Review Time ................................................................. 166
Setting the Auto Power-off Time................................................................. 167
Adjusting the LCD Monitor Brightness ....................................................... 167
Creating and Selecting a Folder................................................................. 168
File Numbering Methods .......................................................................... 170
Setting Copyright Information.............................................................. 172
Auto Rotation of Vertical Images..................................................... 174
C Checking Camera Settin........................................................ 175
Reverting the Camera to the Settngs............................................ 176
Turning the LCD Monir Off/On........................................................ 179
Changing the Shooting Settins Screen Color........................................... 179
Setting the Flash ........................................................................................... 180
f Automatic Sensor Cleaning.................................................................... 184
Appending Dust Delete Data......................................................................... 185
Manual Sensor Cleaning ............................................................................... 187
Wireless Flash Photography
189
8
9
Using Wireless Flash..................................................................................... 190
Easy Wireless Flash Shooting....................................................................... 191
Custom Wireless Flash Shooting .................................................................. 194
Other Settings ............................................................................................... 198
Image Playback
201
H I Searching for Images Quickly............................................................. 202
u/y Magnified View.................................................................................... 204
b Rotating the Image................................................................................... 205
Setting Ratings.............................................................................................. 206
QQuick Control During Playback................................................................ 208
kEnjoying Movies ...................................................................................... 210
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12
Contents
kPlaying Movies.........................................................................................212
XEditing a Movie’s First and Last Scenes...................................................214
Slide Show (Auto Playback)...........................................................................215
Viewing the Images on TV .............................................................................218
K Protecting Images ....................................................................................222
L Erasing Images .........................................................................................224
C Shooting Information Display................................................................226
Post-Processing Images
U Creative Filters .........................................................................................230
S Resize ......................................................................................................233
229
10
11
Printing Images
235
Preparing to Print ...........................................................................................236
wPrinting......................................................................................................238
Trimming the Image ....................................................................................243
W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)...........................................................245
W Direct Printing with DPOF ......................................................................248
Customizing the Camera
249
12
13
Setting Custom Functions..................................................................250
Custom Function Settings................................................................252
Registering My Men............................................................................258
Reference
259
Using a Household Power Outlet...................................................................260
Remote Control Shooting...............................................................................261
External Speedlites ........................................................................................263
Using Eye-Fi Cards........................................................................................265
Function Availability Table According to Shooting Modes .............................268
Menu Settings ................................................................................................270
System Map ...................................................................................................276
Troubleshooting Guide...................................................................................278
Error Codes....................................................................................................287
Specifications.................................................................................................288
Safety Warnings.............................................................................................297
Software Start Guide
Software Start Guide......................................................................................302
301
14
15
Quick Reference Guide and Instruction Manual Index
Quick Reference Guide..................................................................................306
Index ..............................................................................................................318
305
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13
Handling Precautions
Camera Care
This camera is a precision instrument. Do not drop it or subject it to physical
shock.
The camera is not waterproof and cannot be used underwater. If you
accidentally drop the camera into water, promptly consult your nearest
Canon Service Center. Wipe off any water droplets with a dry cloth. If the
camera has been exposed to salty air, wipe it with a well-wrung wet cloth.
Never leave the camera near anything having a strong magnetic field such
as a magnet or electric motor. Also avoid using or leaving the camera near
anything emitting strong radio waves such as a large antenna. Strong
magnetic fields can cause camera misoperation or destroy image data.
Do not leave the camera in excessive heat such as in a car in direct
sunlight. High temperatures can cause the camera to malfunction.
The camera contains precision electronic circuitry. Never attempt to
disassemble the camera yourself.
Use a blower to blow away dust on the lens, viewfinder, reflex mirror, and
focusing screen. Do not use cleaners that contin organic solvents to clean
the camera body or lens. For stubborn dirt, tathe camera to the nearest
Canon Service Center.
Do not touch the camera’s electcocts with your fingers. This is to
prevent the contacts from corroorrded contacts can cause camera
misoperation.
If the camera is suddenly brought in from the cold into a warm room,
condensation may form on the camera and internal parts. To prevent
condensation, first put the camera in a sealed plastic bag and let it adjust to
the warmer temperature before taking it out of the bag.
If condensation forms on the camera, do not use the camera. This is to
avoid damaging the camera. If there is condensation, remove the lens, card
and battery from the camera, and wait until the condensation has
evaporated before using the camera.
If the camera will not be used for an extended period, remove the battery
and store the camera in a cool, dry, well-ventilated location. Even while the
camera is in storage, press the shutter button a few times once in a while to
check that the camera is still working.
Avoid storing the camera where there are corrosive chemicals such as a
darkroom or chemical lab.
If the camera has not been used for an extended period, test all its functions
before using it. If you have not used the camera for some time or if there is
an important shoot coming up, have the camera checked by your Canon
dealer or check the camera yourself and make sure it is working properly.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14
Handling Precautions
LCD Monitor
Although the LCD monitor is manufactured with very high precision
technology with over 99.99% effective pixels, there might be a few dead
pixels among the remaining 0.01% or less pixels. Dead pixels displaying
only black or red, etc., are not a malfunction. They do not affect the images
recorded.
If the LCD monitor is left on for a prolonged period, screen burn-in may
occur where you see remnants of what was displayed. However, this is only
temporary and will disappear when the camera is left unused for a few
days.
In low or high temperatures, the LCD monitor display may seem slow or it
might look black. It will return to normal at room temperature.
Cards
To protect the card and its recorded data, note the following:
Do not drop, bend, or wet the card. Do not subject it to excessive force,
physical shock, or vibration.
Do not touch the card’s electronic contacs ith your fingers or anything
metallic.
Do not store or use the card nar aing having a strong magnetic field
such as a TV set, speakersgnt. Also avoid places prone to having
static electricity.
Do not leave the card in direct sunlight or near a heat source.
Store the card in a cas.
Do not store the card in hot, dusty, or humid locations.
Lens
After detaching the lens from the camera, attach the lens
caps or put down the lens with the rear end up to avoid
scratching the lens surface and electrical contacts.
Contacts
Cautions During Prolonged Use
If you use continuous shooting, Live View shooting, or
movie shooting for a prolonged period, the camera may
become hot. Although this is not a malfunction, holding the
hot camera for a long period can cause slight skin burns.
About smudges adhering to the front of the sensor
Besides dust entering the camera from outside, in rare cases lubricant from the
camera’s internal parts may adhere to the front of the sensor. In case visible
spots still remain after the automatic sensor cleaning, having the sensor cleaned
by a Canon Service Center is recommended.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
15
Quick Start Guide
Insert the battery. (p.28)
To charge the battery, see page 26.
1
Insert a card. (p.29)
With the card’s label facing
toward the camera back,
insert it into the slot.
2
White index
Red index Attach the ens. (p.36)
Alige len’ white or red index
th e camera’s index in the
ching color.
3
4
5
Set the lens focus mode switch
to <AF>. (p.36)
Set the power switch to <1>,
and set the Mode Dial to <A>
(Scene Intelligent Auto). (p.50)
All the necessary camera settings
will be set automatically.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
16
Quick Start Guide
Flip out the LCD monitor. (p.31)
When the LCD monitor displays the
date/time setting screen, see page
34.
6
7
Focus the subject. (p.40)
Look through the viewfinder and
aim the viewfinder center over the
subject.
Press the shutter button halfway,
and the camera will focus the
subject.
If necesary, the built-in flash will
up atomatically.
ke the picture. (p.40)
Press the shutter button completely
to take the picture.
8
9
Review the picture. (p.166)
The captured image will be
displayed for approx. 2 sec. on the
LCD monitor.
To display the image again, press
the <x> button (p.71).
To shoot while looking at the LCD monitor, see “Live View
Shooting” (p.123).
To view the images captured so far, see “Image Playback” (p.71).
To delete an image, see “Erasing Images” (p.224).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
17
Nomenclature
The names in bold indicate the parts mentioned up until the “Basic
Shooting and Image Playback” section.
Mode Dial (p.22)
Power switch (p.32)
Built-in flash/AF-assist beam
(p.90/86)
EF Lens mount index (p.36)
<B> Display button
(p.47,152,167,179)
EF-S Lens mount index (p.36)
Flash-sync contacts
<Z> ISO speed
setting button (p.79)
Hot shoe (p.263)
<6> Main Dial
<V> Focal plane
mark (p.61)
Shutter button
(p.40)
Strap mount
(p.25)
Red-eye
Microphone
(p.142)
reduction/
Self-timer
lamp (p.91/89)
<D> Flash
button (p.90)
Remote control
sensor
(p.122,261)
Grip
Mirror (p.122,187)
Terminal cover
Contacts (p.15)
Lens mount
Lens release button
(p.37)
Depth-of-field preview
button (p.98)
Lens lock pin
Audio/video OUT/
Digital terminal (p.221,236)
Remote control
terminal (p.262)
External microphone
IN terminal (p.160)
Body cap (p.36)
HDMI mini OUT
terminal (p.218)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
18
Nomenclature
Eyecup (p.262)
Dioptric adjustment knob (p.39)
<A> Live View shooting/
Movie shooting button
(p.124/142)
Viewfinder eyepiece
<A/I> AE lock/
FE lock button/
Index/Reduce button
(p.107/108/202/204,243)
<C> Info button
(p.47,71,126,146,175)
<S/u>
AF point selection/
Magnify button
(p.85/204,243)
<M> Menu
button (p.43)
Speaker
(p.212)
LCD monitor
(p.31,43,167)
Card slot
cover (p.29)
DC cord hole
(p.260)
<O> Aperture/
Exposure compensation
button (p.99/103)
Access lamp (p.30)
Tripod socket
<Q/l> Quick Control button/
Direct print button (p.41/241)
Battery compartment
cover release lever (p.28)
Battery compartment cover
<x> Playback button (p.71)
<0> Setting button (p.43)
<S> Cross keys (p.43)
(p.28)
<L> Erase button (p.224)
<WB>
<XA>
White balance selection button (p.117)
Picture Style selection button (p.81)
<Yi/Q> Drive mode selection button (p.88,89)
<ZE> AF mode selection button (p.83)
Card slot (p.29)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
19
Nomenclature
Shooting Settings Display (in Creative Zone modes, p.22)
Shutter speed
Aperture
Exposure level indicator
Exposure compensation
amount (p.103)
c Main Dial pointer (p.93)
Auto Lighting Optimizer (p.109)
ISO speed (p.79)
AEB range (p.105)
Shooting mode
Highlight tone priority
(p.254)
Picture Style (p.81)
AF mode (p.83)
X
One-Shot AF
9
AI Focus AF
Z
AI Servo AF
yFlash exposure
compensation (p.104)
0 External flash
exposure compensation
Built-in flash
func. setting*1 (p.181)
Image-recording quality
(p.76)
g
Manual Focusing
73
83
74
84
7a
8a
b
Large/Fine
Large/Normal
Medium/Fine
Medium/Normal
Small 1/Fine
Small 1/Normal
Small 2 (Fine)
Small 3 (Fine)
RAW
Quick Control icon (p.41)
White balance (p.117)
QAuto
W Daylight
EShade
RCloudy
c
Y Tungsten light
U White fluorescent light
1
1+73RAW+Large/Fine
I
Flash
O Custom
Number of possible shots
Number of possible shots
during WB bracketing
Self-timer countdown
Battery check (p.33)
zxcn
Drive mode (p.88,89)
2White balance correction (p.119)
B White balance bracketing (p.120)
u
Single shooting
Continuous shooting
i
Q Self-timer:10 sec/Remote control
l Self-timer:2 sec
Metering mode (p.102)
q
Evaluative metering
wPartial metering
rSpot metering
eCenter-weighted average metering
q Self-timer:Continuous
Eye-Fi transmission status*2 (p.265)
*1: Displayed when the built-in flash is popped up.
*2: Displayed if an Eye-Fi card is used.
The display will show only the settings currently applied.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
20
Nomenclature
Viewfinder Information
Spot metering circle
AF point activation indicator < >
AF points
Focusing screen
<Z>
ISO speed
<2>
White balance
correction
<A> AE lock/
<o> Focus
AEB in-progress
confirmation
light
Max. burst
<D> Flash-ready
Improper FE lock
warning
<
0
> Monochrome shooting
ISO speed
<e> High-speed sync
(FP flash)
<A> Highlight tone priority
<d> FE lock/
FEB in-progress
Exposure level indicator
Exposure compensation amount
AEB range
<y> Flash exposure
Red-eye reduction lamp-on indicator
compensation
Aperture
Card full warning (FuLL)
Card error warning (Card)
No card warning (Card)
Shutter speed
FE lock (FEL)
Busy (buSY)
Built-in flash recycling (D buSY)
The display will show only the settings currently applied.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
21
Nomenclature
Mode Dial
The Mode Dial includes the Basic Zone modes, Creative Zone modes,
and the Movie shooting mode.
Creative Zone
These modes give you more control for
shooting various subjects.
d
: Program AE (p.74)
s
f
a
: Shutter-priority AE (p.94)
: Aperture-priority AE (p.96)
: Manual exposure (p.99)
8: Automatic depth-of-field AE
(p.101)
Basic Zone
All you do is press the shuter utton.
The camera sets everything to suit the
subject.
A : Scene Intelligent Auto (p.50)
7 : Flash Off (p.55)
C : Creative Auto (p.56)
k: Movie shooting
(p.141)
Image Zone
2 : Portrait (p.59)
3 : Landscape (p.60)
4 : Close-up (p.61)
5 : Sports (p.62)
6 : Night Portrait (p.63)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
22
Nomenclature
Lens
Lens without a distance scale
Focusing ring (p.87,138)
Focus mode switch (p.36)
Zoom ring (p.37)
Zoom position index (p.37)
Hood mount
(p.294)
Filter thread
(front of lens) (p.294)
Image Stabilizer switch (p.38)
Lens mount index
Contacts (p.15)
Lens with a distance scal
Focus mode switch (p.36)
Hood mount
(p.294)
Zoom position index (p.37)
Distance scale
Filter thread
(front of lens) (p.294)
Zoom ring (p.37)
Focusing ring (p.87,138)
Contacts (p.15)
Image Stabilizer switch (p.38)
Lens mount index (p.36)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
23
Nomenclature
Battery Charger LC-E8
Charger for Battery Pack LP-E8 (p.26).
Power plug
Battery pack slot
Charge lamp
Full-charge lamp
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS-SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS.
DANGER-TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR LECTRIC SHOCK,
CAREFULLY FOLLOW THESE INSTRUNS.
For connection to a supply not in thS.Ause an attachment plug adapter
of the proper configuration for the utlt, if needed.
Battery Charger LC-E8E
Charger for Battery Pack LP-E8 (p.26).
Battery pack slot
Charge lamp
Full-charge lamp
Power cord
Power cord socket
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
24
Getting Started
This chapter explains preparatorstepbefore you start
shooting and basic camera opeons.
Attg the Strap
Pass the end of the strap through
the camera’s strap mount eyelet
from the bottom. Then pass it
through the strap’s buckle as shown
in the illustration. Pull the strap to
take up any slack and make sure
the strap will not loosen from the
buckle.
The eyepiece cover is also
attached to the strap (p.262).
Eyepiece cover
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
25
Charging the Battery
Remove the protective cover.
Detach the protective cover provided
1
2
3
with the battery.
Attach the battery.
As shown in the illustration, attach the
battery securely to the charger.
To detach the battery, follow the
above procedure in reverse.
LC-E8
Recharge the battery.
For LC-E8
As shown bthe arrow, flip out the
batthargr’s prongs and insert
prngs into a power outlet.
Fo-E8E
LC-E8E
Connect the power cord to the
charger and insert the plug into the
power outlet.
X Recharging starts automatically and
the charge lamp turns orange.
X When the battery is fully recharged,
the full-charge lamp will turn green.
It takes approx. 2 hours to fully recharge a completely exhausted
battery at 23°C / 73°F. The time required to recharge the battery
depends on the ambient temperature and the battery’s charge level.
For safety reasons, recharging in low temperatures (6
43 F - 50 F) will take a longer time (up to 4 hours).
°C - 10°C /
°
°
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
26
Charging the Battery
Tips for Using the Battery and Charger
Upon purchase, the battery is not fully charged.
Recharge the battery before using.
Recharge the battery on the day before or on the day it is to be
used.
Even during storage, a charged battery will gradually drain and lose
its power.
After recharging the battery, detach it and unplug the charger
from the power outlet.
When not using the camera, remove the battery.
If the battery is left in the camera for a prolonged period, a small
amount of power current is released, resulting in excess discharge
and shorter battery life. Store the battewith the protective cover
(provided) attached. Storing the ery ater it is fully charged can
lower the battery’s performe.
The battery charger can abe used in foreign countries.
The battery charger icompatible with a 100 V AC to 240 V AC 50/
60 Hz power source. If necessary, attach a commercially-available
plug adapter for the respective country or region. Do not attach any
portable voltage transformer to the battery charger. Doing so can
damage the battery charger.
If the battery becomes exhausted quickly even after being fully
charged, the battery has reached the end of its service life.
Purchase a new battery.
After disconnecting the charger’s power plug, do not touch the prongs for
at least 3 sec.
Do not charge any battery other than a Battery Pack LP-E8.
The Battery Pack LP-E8 is dedicated to Canon products only. Using it
with an incompatible battery charger or product may result in malfunction
or accidents for which Canon cannot be held liable.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
27
Installing and Removing the Battery
Installing the Battery
Load a fully charged Battery Pack LP-E8 into the camera.
Open the cover.
Slide the lever as shown by the
1
arrows and open the cover.
Insert the battery.
2
Insert the end with the battery
contacts.
Insert the battery until it locks in
place.
Close tcoer.
ress e cover until it snaps shut.
3
Removing the Battery
Open the cover and remove the
battery.
Press the battery release lever as shown
by the arrow and remove the battery.
To prevent short circuiting of the
battery contacts, be sure to attach the
protective cover (provided, p.26) to
the battery.
After opening the battery compartment cover, be careful not to swing it back
further. Otherwise, the hinge might break.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
28
Installing and Removing the Card
The card (sold separately) can be an SD, SDHC, or SDXC memory
card. The captured images are recorded onto the card.
Make sure the card’s write-protect switch is set upward to
enable writing/erasing.
Installing the Card
Open the cover.
Slide the cover as shown by the
1
arrows to open it.
Insert the card.
Write-protect switch
2
3
As shown by the illustration, face
the cardlabel side toward you
ansert it until it clicks in place.
Close the cover.
Close the cover and slide it in the
direction shown by the arrows until it
snaps shut.
When you set the power switch to
<1>, the number of possible shots
(p.33) will be displayed on the LCD
monitor.
Possible shots
The number of possible shots depends on the remaining capacity of the
card, image-recording quality, ISO speed, etc.
Setting [1 Release shutter without card] to [Disable] will prevent you
from forgetting to insert a card (p.166).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
29
Installing and Removing the Card
Removing the Card
Open the cover.
1
Set the power switch to <2>.
Make sure the access lamp is off,
then open the cover.
If “Recording ...” is displayed, close
the cover.
Access lamp
Remove the card.
Gently push in the card, then let go.
The card will stick out.
2
Pull the card straight out, then close
the cover.
When the access lamp is lit or blinking, it indicates that images are
being written to or read by the card, being erased, or data is being
transferred. Do not open the card slot cover during this time.
Also, never do any of the following while the access lamp is lit or
blinking. Otherwise, it can damage the image data, card, or camera.
• Removing the card.
• Removing the battery.
• Shaking or banging the camera around.
If the card already contains recorded images, the image number might
not start from 0001 (p.170).
Do not touch the card’s contacts with your fingers or metal objects.
If a card-related error message is displayed on the LCD monitor, remove
and reinsert the card. If the error persists, use a different card.
If you can transfer all the images on the card to a computer, transfer all
the images and then format the card with the camera (p.45). The card
may then return to normal.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
30
Using the LCD Monitor
After you flip out the LCD monitor, you can set menu functions, use Live
View shooting, shoot movies, and playback images and movies. You
can change the direction and angle of the LCD monitor.
Flip out the LCD monitor.
1
Rotate the LCD monitor.
When the LCD monitor is swung out,
180°
2
90°
you can rotate it up or down or face it
forward toward the subject.
The indiated angle is only
175°
approximte.
Face toward you.
3
ormally, face the LCD monitor
oward you.
Be careful not to force and break the hinge when rotating the LCD monitor.
When not using the camera, close the LCD monitor back with the screen
facing inward. This will protect the screen.
During Live View shooting or movie shooting, facing the LCD monitor
toward the subject will display a mirror image on the screen.
Depending on the angle of the LCD monitor, the display may turn off right
before the LCD monitor is closed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
31
Turning on the Power
If you turn on the power switch and the date/time setting screen
appears, see page 34 to set the date/time.
<1> : The camera turns on.
<2> : The camera is turned off and
does not operate. Set to this
position when not using the
camera.
About the Automatic Self-Cleaning Sensor
Whenever you set the power switch to <1> or <2>, the sensor
cleaning will be executed automatically. During the sensor cleaning,
the LCD monitor will display <f>. Even during the sensor
cleaning, you can still shoot by pressing thshutter button halfway
(p.40) to stop the sensor cleaning ake picture.
If you repeatedly turn the powswih <1>/<2> at a short
interval, the <f> icon mighe displayed. This is normal and
not a problem.
3 About Auto Power Off
To save battery power, the camera turns off automatically after about
30 seconds of non-operation. To turn on the camera again, just
press the shutter button halfway (p.40).
You can change the auto power-off time with [5 Auto power off]
(p.167).
If you set the power switch to <2> while an image is being recorded to
the card, [Recording ...] will be displayed and the power will turn off after
the card finishes recording the image.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
32
Turning on the Power
z Checking the Battery Level
When the power switch is set to <1>, the battery level will be
indicated in one of four levels:
z : Battery level is OK.
x : Battery level is low, but still
enough for now.
c : Battery will be exhausted soon.
(Blinks)
n : Battery must be recharged.
Battery Life
Temperature
No Flash
At 23°C / 7
Approx0 sts
Approxshots
At 0°C / 32°F
Approx. 470 shots
Approx. 400 shots
50% Flash Use
The figures above are based on a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E8, no Live
View shooting, and CIPA (Camera & Imaging Products Association) testing
standards.
The Battery Grip BG-E8 approximately doubles the number of possible shots
with two LP-E8 batteries installed. With size-AA/LR6 alkaline batteries, the
number of possible shots at 23°C / 73°F is approx. 470 shots without flash use
and approx. 270 shots with 50% flash use.
The number of possible shots will decrease with any of the following
operations:
• Pressing the shutter button halfway for a prolonged period.
• Often activating only the AF without taking a picture.
• Using the LCD monitor often.
• Using the lens Image Stabilizer.
The lens operation is powered by the camera’s battery. Depending on
the lens used, the number of possible shots may be lower.
For the number of possible shots with Live View shooting, see page 125.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
33
3 Setting the Date and Time
When you turn on the power for the first time or if the date/time has
been reset, the Date/Time setting screen will appear. Follow steps 3
and 4 to set the date/time. Note that the date/time appended to
recorded images will be based on this date/time setting. Be sure to
set the correct date/time.
Display the menu screen.
1
Press the <M> button to display
the menu screen.
Under the [6] tab, select [Date/
2 Time].
Press the <U> key to select the
[6] tab.
Prese <V> key to select [Date/
e], hen press <0>.
See date and time.
3
Press the <U> key to select the
date or time number.
Press <0> so <a> is displayed.
Press the <V> key to set the
number, then press <0>. (Returns
to b.)
Exit the setting.
Press the <U> key to select [OK],
4
then press <0>.
X The date/time will be set.
If you store the camera without the battery or if the camera’s battery
becomes exhausted, the date/time might be reset. If this happens, set the
date/time again.
The date/time set will start from when you press <0> in step 4.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
34
3 Selecting the Interface Language
Display the menu screen.
1
Press the <M> button to display
the menu screen.
Under the [6] tab, select
2 [LanguageK].
Press the <U> key to select the
[6] tab.
Press the <V> key to select
[LanguageK] (the fourth item from
the top), then press <0>.
Set the desired language.
3
Press the <S> key to select the
language, then press <0>.
X The interface language will change.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
35
Attaching and Detaching a Lens
Attaching a Lens
Remove the caps.
Remove the rear lens cap and the
1
body cap by turning them as shown
by the arrows.
White index
Attach the lens.
2
Align the lens’ red or white index with
the camera’s index matching the
same color. Turn the lens as shown
by the arrow until it snaps in place.
Red index
On he ns, set the focus mode
3 sto <AF> (autofocus).
If it is set to <MF> (manual focus),
autofocus will not operate.
Remove the front lens cap.
4
Minimizing Dust
When changing lenses, do it in a place with minimal dust.
When storing the camera without a lens attached, be sure to attach the
body cap to the camera.
Remove dust on the body cap before attaching it.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
36
Attaching and Detaching a Lens
About Zooming
To zoom, turn the zoom ring on the lens
with your fingers.
If you want to zoom, do it before
focusing. Turning the zoom ring after
achieving focus may throw off the
focus slightly.
Detaching the Lens
While pressing the lens release
button, turn the lens as shown by
the arrow.
Turn the ens until it stops, then
dh it.
Atch the rear lens cap to the
etached lens.
Do not look at the sun directly through any lens. Doing so may cause
loss of vision.
If the front part (focusing ring) of the lens rotates during autofocusing, do
not touch the rotating part.
Image Conversion Factor
Since the image sensor size is
smaller than the 35mm film
Image sensor size (Approx.)
(22.3 x 14.9 mm / 0.88 x 0.59 in.)
format, it will look like the lens
focal length is increased by
approx. 1.6x.
35mm image size
(36 x 24 mm / 1.42 x 0.94 in.)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
37
About the Lens Image Stabilizer
When you use the IS lens’ built-in Image Stabilizer, camera shake is
corrected to obtain a sharper shot. The procedure explained here is
based on the EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS II lens as an example.
* IS stands for Image Stabilizer.
Set the IS switch to <1>.
1
Set also the camera’s power switch to
<1>.
Press the shutter button halfway.
2
X The Image Stabilizer will operate.
Take the picture.
When the pture looks steady in the
3
viewer, press the shutter button
mptely to take the picture.
The Image Stabilizer may not be effective if the subject moves at the time
of exposure.
The Image Stabilizer may not be effective for excessive shaking such as
on a rocking boat.
The Image Stabilizer can operate with the focus mode switch set to
either <f> or <g>.
If the camera is mounted on a tripod, you can save battery power by
switching the IS switch to <2>.
The Image Stabilizer is effective even when the camera is mounted on a
monopod.
Some IS lenses enable you to switch the IS mode manually to suit the
shooting conditions. However, the following lenses switch the IS mode
automatically:
• EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS II
• EF-S15-85mm f/3.5-5.6 IS USM
• EF-S18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS
• EF-S18-200mm f/3.5-5.6 IS
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
38
Basic Operation
Adjusting the Viewfinder Clarity
Turn the dioptric adjustment
knob.
Turn the knob left or right until the
nine AF points in the viewfinder look
sharp.
If the camera’s dioptric adjustment still cannot provide a sharp viewfinder
image, using Dioptric Adjustment Lens E (10 types, sold separately) is
recommended.
Holding the Camera
To obtain sharp images, hold the camera sll to minimize camera
shake.
Horizontal shooting
Vertical shooting
1. Wrap your right hand around the camera grip firmly.
2. Hold the lens bottom with your left hand.
3. Press the shutter button lightly with your right hand’s index finger.
4. Press your arms and elbows lightly against the front of your body.
5. To maintain a stable stance, place one foot in front of the other.
6. Press the camera against your face and look through the viewfinder.
To shoot while looking at the LCD monitor, see page 123.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
39
Basic Operation
Shutter Button
The shutter button has two steps. You can press the shutter button
halfway. Then you can further press the shutter button completely.
Pressing halfway
This activates autofocusing and the
automatic exposure system that sets the
shutter speed and aperture.
The exposure setting (shutter speed and
aperture) is displayed in the viewfinder
(0).
While you press the shutter button
halfway, the LCD monitor will turn off
(p.179).
Pressicompletely
Thelees the shutter and takes the
pi
Preventing Camera Shake
Hand-held camera movement during the moment of exposure is called
camera shake. It can cause blurred pictures. To prevent camera shake,
note the following:
• Hold and steady the camera as shown on the previous page.
• Press the shutter button halfway to autofocus, then slowly press the
shutter button completely.
If you press the shutter button completely without pressing it halfway first
or if you press the shutter button halfway and then press it completely
immediately, the camera will take a moment before it takes the picture.
Even during the menu display, image playback, and image recording,
you can instantly go back to shooting-ready by pressing the shutter
button halfway.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
40
QQuick Control for Shooting Functions
You can directly select and set the shooting functions displayed on the
LCD monitor. This is called the Quick Control screen.
Press the <Q> button.
1
X The Quick Control screen will appear
(7).
Set the desired function.
2
Press the <S> key to select the
function to be set.
X The selected function and Feature
guide (p.48) will appear.
Turn the <6> dial to change the
seng.
Basic Zone modes
Creative Zone modes
Take the picture.
Press the shutter button completely to
take the picture.
3
X The captured image will be displayed.
For the functions settable in Basic Zone modes and the setting procedure,
see page 64.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
41
QQuick Control for Shooting Functions
Settable Functions on Quick Control Screen
White balance correction* (p.119)
Shutter speed (p.94)
Aperture (p.96)
Highlight tone priority* (p.254)
Shooting mode* (p.22)
Exposure compensation/
AEB setting (p.103, 105)
ISO speed (p.79)
Flash exposure
compensation (p.104)
Built-in flash function
Picture Style (p.81)
Image-recording quality
(p.76)
AF mode (p.83)
White balance (p.117)
Auto Lighting Optimizer
(p.109)
Drive mode (p.88, 89)
Metering mode (p.102)
Whe balance bracketing*
(p.0)
Asterisked functions cannot be sh thQuick Control screen.
Function Setting Screen
Select the desired function and press
<0>. The function’s setting screen
will appear.
Press the <U> key or turn the
<6> dial to change the setting.
There are also functions to be set
with the <C> button.
Press <0> to finalize the setting and
to return to the Quick Control screen.
Ð <0>
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
42
3 Menu Operations
With menus, you can set various functions such as the image-recording
quality, date/time, etc. While looking at the LCD monitor, use the
<M> button, <S> cross keys, and <0> button on the camera
back to operate the menus.
<M> button
<0> button
LCD monitor
<S> Cross keys
Menu Screen
In the Basic Zone, Movie shooting e, and Creative Zone, the tabs
and menu options displayed e dferent.
Basic Zone modes
Movie shooting mode
Creative Zone modes
5 Set-up
3 Playback
1 Shooting
9 My Menu
Tab
Menu settings
Menu items
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
43
3 Menu Operations
Menu Setting Procedure
Display the menu screen.
Press the <M> button to display
1
the menu screen.
Select a tab.
Press the <U> key to select a
2
3
menu tab.
Select the desired item.
Press the <V> key to select the
item, then press <0>.
Select setting.
4
s te <V> or <U> key to
ct the desired setting. (Some
settings require you to press either
the <V> or <U> key to select it.)
The current setting is indicated in
blue.
Set the desired setting.
Press <0> to set it.
5
6
Exit the setting.
Press the <M> button to return
to the shooting settings display.
In step 2, you can also turn the <6> dial to select a menu tab.
The explanation of menu functions hereinafter assumes that you have
pressed the <M> button to display the menu screen.
For details about each menu item, see page 270.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
44
3 Formatting the Card
If the card is new or was previously formatted by another camera or
computer, format the card with the camera.
When the card is formatted, all images and data in the card will
be erased. Even protected images will be erased, so make
sure there is nothing you need to keep. If necessary, transfer
the images to a computer, etc., before formatting the card.
Select [Format].
Under the [5] tab, select [Format],
1
then press <0>.
Format the card.
2
Select [OK], then press <0>.
X Tard ill be formatted.
Wn the formatting is completed,
e menu will reappear.
For low-level formatting, press the
<L> button to checkmark [Low level
format] with <X>, then select [OK].
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
45
3 Formatting the Card
Execute [Format] in the following cases:
The card is new.
The card was formatted by a different camera or a computer.
The card is full with images or data.
A card-related error is displayed (p.287).
About Low-level Formatting
Do low-level formatting if the card’s recording or reading speed seems slow
or if you want to totally erase all data in the card.
Since low-level formatting will erase all recordable sectors in the card, the
formatting will take slightly longer than normal formatting.
You can stop the low-level formatting by selecting [Cancel]. Even in this
case, normal formatting will have been completed and you can use the
card as usual.
When the card is formatted or data is erased, only the file management
information is changed. The actual data is not completely erased. Be
aware of this when selling or discarding the card. When discarding the
card, execute low-level formatting or destroy the card physically to
prevent the data from being leaked.
Before using a new Eye-Fi card, the software in the card must be
installed in your computer. Then format the card with the camera.
The card capacity displayed on the card format screen might be smaller
than the capacity indicated on the card.
This device incorporates exFAT technology licensed from Microsoft.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
46
Switching the LCD Monitor Display
The LCD monitor can display the shooting settings screen, menu
screen, captured images, etc.
Shooting Settings
When you turn on the power switch,
the shooting settings will be displayed.
When you press the shutter button
halfway, the display will turn off.
And when you let go of the shutter
button, the display will turn on.
You can also turn off the display by
pressing the <B> button. Press
the button again to turn on the display.
Pressing the <C> button toggles
between he shooting settings screen
(pand camera settings screen
p.175).
Menu Functins
Captured Image
Appears when you press the
<M> button. Press the
button again to return to the
shooting settings screen.
Appears when you press the
<x> button. Press the button
again to return to the shooting
settings screen.
You can set [5 LCD off/on btn] so that the shooting settings display
does not keep turning off and on (p.179).
Even when the menu screen or captured image is displayed, pressing
the shutter button will enable you to shoot immediately.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
47
Feature Guide
The Feature guide is a simple description of the respective function or
option. It is displayed when you change the shooting mode or use the
Quick Control screen to set a shooting function, Live View shooting,
movie shooting, or playback. When you select a function or option on
the Quick Control screen, the Feature guide description is displayed.
The Feature guide turns off when you further proceed with any
operation.
Shooting mode (Sample)
Quick Control (Sample)
Shooting function
Live View shooting
Playback
3 Disabling the Feature Guide
Select [Feature guide].
Under the [6] tab, select [Feature
guide], then press <0>. Select
[Disable], then press <0>.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
48
Basic Shooting and
Image Playback
This chapter explains how to use he Bsic Zone modes
on the Mode Dial for best resultnd how to playback
images.
With Basic Zone mode, all you do is point and shoot and the
camera sets everything automatically (p.64, 268). Also, to
prevent botched pictures due to mistaken operations, major
shooting settings cannot be changed in fully-automatic modes.
About the Auto Lighting Optimizer
In Basic Zone modes, the Auto Lighting Optimizer (p.109) will
adjust the image automatically to obtain the optimum brightness
and contrast. It is also enabled by default in Creative Zone modes.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
49
A
Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto)
The camera analyzes the scene and sets the optimum settings
automatically. It is a fully-automatic mode. Even with moving
subjects, the camera will automatically continue to focus the subject
(p.53).
Set the Mode Dial to <A>.
1
AF point
Aim any AF point over the
2 subject.
All the AF points will be used to focus,
and generally the closest object will
be focused.
Aiming the enter AF point over the
subject will ake focusing easier.
Fthe subject.
3
s the shutter button halfway, and
the lens focusing ring will rotate to
focus.
X The dot inside the AF point achieving
focus flashes briefly in red. At the
same time, the beeper will sound and
the focus confirmation light <o> in
the viewfinder will light.
X If necessary, the built-in flash will pop-
up automatically.
Focus confirmation light
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
50
A Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto)
Take the picture.
Press the shutter button completely to
take the picture.
4
X The captured image will be displayed
for approx. 2 sec. on the LCD
monitor.
If the built-in flash has popped up,
you can push it back down with your
fingers.
The <A> mode makes the colors look more impressive in nature, outdoor,
and sunset scenes. If the desired color tone is not obtained, use a Creative
Zone mode and select a suitable Picture Style (p.81).
FAQ
The focus confirmation l<> blinks and focus is not
achieved.
Aim the AF point ovr an arehaving good contrast, then press the
shutter button halfway (p40). If you are too close to the subject,
move away and try again.
Sometimes multiple AF points flash simultaneously.
This indicates that focus has been achieved at all those AF points.
When the AF point covering the desired subject flashes, take the
picture.
The beeper continues to beep softly. (The focus confirmation
light <o> does not light.)
It indicates that the camera is focusing continuously on a moving
subject. (The focus confirmation light <o> does not light.) You can
take sharp pictures of a moving subject.
Pressing the shutter button halfway does not focus the subject.
If the focus mode switch on the lens is set to <MF> (Manual Focus),
set it to <AF> (Auto Focus).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
51
A Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto)
Although it is daylight, the flash popped up.
For a backlit subject, the flash may pop up to help lighten the
subject’s dark areas.
In low light, the built-in flash fired a series of flashes.
Pressing the shutter button halfway may trigger the built-in flash to
fire a series of flashes to assist autofocusing. This is called AF-assist
beam. Its effective range is about 4 meters/13.1 feet.
Although flash was used, the picture came out dark.
The subject was too far away. The subject should be within 5
meters/16.4 feet from the camera.
When flash was used, the bottom part of the picture came out
unnaturally dark.
The subject was too close to the camera, and a shadow was created
by the lens barrel. The subject should be aleast 1 meter/3.3 feet
away from the camera. If a hood has been ttached to the lens,
remove it before taking the flash pic.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
52
A
Full Auto (Scene Intelligent Auto) Techniques
Recomposing the Shot
Depending on the scene, position the subject toward the left or right to
create a balanced background and good perspective.
In the <A> (Scene Intelligent Auto) mode, while you press the shutter
button halfway to focus a still subject, the focus will be locked. You can
then recompose the shot and press the shtter button completely to
take the picture. This is called “focck”. ocus lock is also possible
in other Basic Zone modes (ept <5> Sports).
Shooting a Moving Subject
In the <A> (Scene Intelligent Auto) mode, if the subject moves
(distance to camera changes) during or after you focus, AI Servo AF will
take effect to focus the subject continuously. As long as you keep
aiming the AF point on the subject while pressing the shutter button
halfway, the focusing will be continuous. When you want to take the
picture, press the shutter button completely.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
53
A Full Auto (Scene Intelligent Auto) Techniques
ALive View Shooting
Live View shooting allows you to shoot while looking at the image on
the LCD monitor. For details, see page 123.
Display the Live View image on
the LCD monitor.
Press the <A> button.
X The Live View image will appear on
the LCD monitor.
1
Focus the subject.
2
Aim the center AF point < > on the
subject.
Press the shutter button halfway to focus.
X When focus s achieved, the AF point
will tgreeand the beeper will
oun
The picture.
3
Press the shutter button completely.
X The picture will be taken and the
captured image is displayed on the
LCD monitor.
X After the image review ends, the
camera will return to Live View
shooting automatically.
Press the <A> button to exit Live
View shooting.
You can also rotate the LCD monitor in different directions (p.31).
Normal angle
Low angle
High angle
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
54
7 Disabling Flash
In places where flash photography is prohibited, use the <7> (Flash
Off) mode. This mode is also effective for capturing the particular
ambience of a scene, such as candlelight scenes.
Shooting Tips
Prevent camera shake ithe numeric display in the viewfinder
blinks.
Under low light when camera shake is prone to occur, the
viewfinder’s shutter speed display will blink. Hold the camera steady
or use a tripod. When using a zoom lens, use the wide-angle end to
reduce blur caused by camera shake.
Taking portraits without flash.
In low-light conditions, tell the subject to keep still until the picture is
taken. If the person moves during the exposure, he or she might look
blurred in the picture.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
55
CCreative Auto Shooting
Unlike the <A> Scene Intelligent Auto mode where the camera sets
everything, the <C> Creative Auto mode enables you to easily change
the depth of field, drive mode, and flash firing.
You can also choose the ambience you want to convey in your images.
The default settings are the same as the <A> mode.
* CA stands for Creative Auto.
Set the Mode Dial to <C>.
1
Press the <Q> button. (7)
2
X The Quick Control screen will appear.
Se esired function.
3
s the <V> key to select a
function.
X The selected function and Feature
guide (p.48) will be displayed.
For details on setting each function,
see pages 57-58.
Take the picture.
Press the shutter button completely to
4
take the picture.
If you change the shooting mode or turn the power switch to <2>, the
functions you have set on this screen will revert to their default setting.
However, the self-timer and remote control settings will be retained.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
56
CCreative Auto Shooting
(1)
Shutter speed
Aperture
ISO speed
(2)
(3)
Battery check
Image-recording quality
Possible shots
Pressing the <Q> button enables you tset the following:
(1) Shoot by ambience selection
You can set the ambience anto convey in your images. Press
the <U> key or trn the > dial to select the desired
ambience. You can aso select it from a list by pressing <0>. For
details, see page 65.
(2) Blurring/sharpening the background
If you move the index mark toward the left, the background will look
more blurred. If you move it toward the right, the background will
look more in focus. If you want to blur the background, see “Shooting
Portraits” on page 59. Press the <U> key or turn the <6> dial to
adjust it as desired.
Depending on the lens and shooting conditions, the background
might not look so blurred. This function cannot be set (grayed out)
while the built-in flash is raised in the <a> or <r> mode. If flash is
used, this setting will not be applied.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
57
CCreative Auto Shooting
(3) Drive mode/Flash firing
When you press <0>, the drive mode
or flash firing setting screen will appear.
Set as desired, then press <0> to
finalize the setting and return to the
Quick Control screen.
Drive mode: Press the <U> key or turn the <6> dial to set it as
desired.
<u> Single shooting : Shoot one image at a time.
<i> Continuous shooting:
While you hold don the shutter button
completely, ots ill be taken continuously.
You can shup to about 3.7 shots per sec.
<Q> Self-timer:10sec/Remontrol :
The pe is taken 10 seconds after you
press the shutter button. A remote control
can also be used.
<q> Self-timer:Continuous :
Press the <V> key to set the number of
multiple shots (2 to 10) to be taken with the
self-timer. 10 seconds after you press the
shutter button, the set number of multiple
shots will be taken.
Flash firing: Press the <U> key or turn the <6> dial to set it as
desired.
<a> Auto flash: The flash fires automatically when necessary.
<I>
Flash on : The flash fires at all times.
<b> Flash off : The flash is disabled.
When using <j> or <q>, see the
notes on page 89.
When using <b>, see “Disabling Flash” on page 55.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
58
2 Shooting Portraits
The <2> (Portrait) mode blurs the background to make the human
subject stand out. It also makes skin tones and the hair look softer.
Shooting Tips
The further the disance between the subject and background,
the better.
The further the distance between the subject and background, the
more blurred the background will look. The subject will also stand
out better in front of a plain, dark background.
Use a telephoto lens.
If you have a zoom lens, use the telephoto end to fill the frame with
the subject from the waist up. Move in closer if necessary.
Focus the face.
Check that the AF point covering the face flashes in red.
If you hold down the shutter button, you can shoot continuously to obtain
different poses and facial expressions. (max. approx. 3.7 shots/sec.)
If necessary, the built-in flash will pop up automatically.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
59
3 Shooting Landscapes
Use the <3> (Landscape) mode for wide scenery, night scenes, or to
have everything in focus from near to far. For vivid blues and greens,
and very sharp and crisp images.
Shooting Tips
With a zoom lens, use the wide-angle end.
When using the wide-angle end of a zoom lens, objects near and far
will be in focus better than at the telephoto end. It also adds breadth
to landscapes.
Shooting night scenes.
Since the built-in flash will be disabled, this
mode <3> is also good for night scenes.
Use a tripod to prevent camera shake.
If you want to photograph a person against
a night scene, set the Mode Dial to <6>
(Night Portrait) and use a tripod (p.63).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
60
4 Shooting Close-ups
When you want to photograph flowers or small things up close, use the
<4> (Close-up) mode. To make small things appear much larger, use a
macro lens (sold separately).
Shooting Tips
Use a simple background.
A simple background makes the flower, etc., stand out better.
Move to the subject as close as possible.
Check the lens for its minimum focusing distance. Some lenses
have indications such as <40.25m/0.8ft>. The lens minimum
focusing distance is measured from the <V> (focal plane) mark on
the top left of the camera to the subject. If you are too close to the
subject, the focus confirmation light <o> will blink.
Under low light, the built-in flash will fire. If you are too close to the
subject and the bottom of the picture looks dark, move away from
the subject.
With a zoom lens, use the telephoto end.
If you have a zoom lens, using the telephoto end will make the
subject look larger.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
61
5 Shooting Moving Subjects
To photograph a moving subject, whether it is a child running or a
moving vehicle, use the <5> (Sports) mode.
Shooting Tips
Use a telephoto lens.
Using a telephoto lens is recommended so you can shoot from afar.
Use the center AF point to focus.
Aim the center AF point over the subject, then press the shutter
button halfway to autofocus. During autofocusing, the beeper will
continue beeping softly. If focus cannot be achieved, the focus
confirmation light <o> will blink.
When you want to take the picture, press the shutter button
completely. If you hold down the shutter button, continuous shooting
(max. approx. 3.7 shots per sec.) and autofocusing will take effect.
Under low light when camera shake is prone to occur, the viewfinder’s
shutter speed display on the bottom left will blink. Hold the camera steady
and shoot.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
62
6 Shooting Portraits at Night
To shoot someone at night and obtain a natural-looking exposure in the
background, use the <6> (Night Portrait) mode.
Shooting Tips
Use a wide-angle lens and a tripod.
When using a zoom lens, use the wide-angle end to obtain a wide
night view. Also, use a tripod to prevent camera shake.
Keep the person within 5 meters/16.4 feet from the camera.
Under low light, the built-in flash will fire automatically to obtain a
good exposure of the person. The maximum effective distance of the
built-in flash is 5 meters/16.4 feet from the camera.
Shoot also with <A> (Scene Intelligent Auto).
Since camera shake is prone to occur with night shots, shooting also
with <A> (Scene Intelligent Auto) is recommended.
Tell the subject to keep still even after the flash fires.
If you use the self-timer together with flash, the self-timer lamp will light
briefly after the picture is taken.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
63
QQuick Control
In Basic Zone modes when the shooting
settings screen is displayed, you can
press the <Q> button to display the
Quick Control screen. The table below
indicates the functions that can be set
with the Quick Control screen in each
Basic Zone mode.
Example: Portrait mode
1
Set the Mode Dial to a Basic Zone mode.
Press the <Q> button. (7)
2
3X The Quick Control screen will appear.
Set the function.
Press the <V> key to select a functio(Step not necessary in
the A/7 mode.)
X The selected function and turguide (p.48) will be displayed.
Press the <U> key or tu<6> dial to change the setting.
Settable Functions in Basic Zone Modes
o: Set automatically k: User selectable
: Not selectable
A
7 C
2
3
4
5
6
Function
(p.50) (p.55) (p.56) (p.59) (p.60) (p.61) (p.62) (p.63)
u: Single shooting
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
i: Continuous shooting
k
k
k
k
Drive
mode
Q: 10 sec./Remote control
k
k
o
k
k
k
k
k
k
o
k
k
o
Self-
timer
q: Continuous shooting
k
k
o
k
after 10 sec.*
Automatic firing
k
k
k
k
Flash firing
Flash on (Fires at all times)
Flash off
o
o
k
k
o
k
k
Shoot by ambience selection (p.65)
Shoot by lighting or scene type (p.68)
Blurring/sharpening the background (p.57)
k
k
k
k
k
k
* Use the <V> key to set the number of continuous shots.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
64
Shoot by Ambience Selection
Except in the <A> (Scene Intelligent Auto) and <7> (Flash Off)
Basic Zone modes, you can select the ambience for shooting.
Ambience
(1) Standard setting
(2) Vivid
A
7 C
k
2
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
3
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
4
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
5
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
6
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
Ambience Effect
No setting
Low / Standard / Strong
Low / Standard / Strong
Low / Standard / Strong
Low / Standard / Strong
Low / Standard / Strong
Low / Medium / High
Low / Medium / High
Blue / B/W / Sepia
k
(3) Soft
k
(4) Warm
k
(5) Intense
k
(6) Cool
k
(7) Brighter
(8) Darker
k
k
(9) Monochrome
k
Set the Mde Dial to any of the
follng modes: <C>, <2>,
3<4>, <5> or <6>.
1
play the Live View image.
2
With the Live View image displayed,
you can see the ambience effect.
Press the <A> button to switch to
Live View shooting.
On the Quick Control screen,
3 select the desired ambience.
Press the <Q> button (7).
Press the <V> key to select
[Standard setting]. [Shoot by
ambience selection] will appear on
the screen’s bottom.
Press the <
U> key or turn the <6>
dial to select the desired ambience.
X
The LCD monitor will show how the image
will look with the selected ambience.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
65
Shoot by Ambience Selection
Set the ambience effect.
4
5
Press the <V> key to select the
effect bar so that [Effect] appears at
the bottom.
Press the <U> key or turn the
<6> dial to select the desired
effect.
Take the picture.
To shoot while the Live View image is
displayed, press the shutter button.
To return to viewfinder shooting,
press the <A> button to exit Live
View shooting. Then press the shutter
button competely to take the picture.
If yoangthe shooting mode or
et thower switch to <2>, the
ng will revert back to [Standard
ng].
The Live View image shown with the ambience setting applied will not
look exactly the same as the actual photo.
Using flash may minimize the ambience effect.
In bright outdoors, the Live View image you see on the screen might not
have exactly the same brightness or ambience as the actual photo. Set
[6 LCD brightness] to 4 and look at the Live View image while the
screen is unaffected by stray light.
If you don’t want the Live View image to be displayed when setting
functions, press the <Q> button after step 1. When you press the <Q>
button, the Quick Control screen is displayed and you can set [Shoot by
ambience selection] and [Shoot by lighting or scene], then shoot with
the viewfinder.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
66
Shoot by Ambience Selection
Ambience Settings
(1) Standard setting
Standard image characteristics for the respective shooting mode.
Note that <2> has image characteristics geared for portraits and
<3> is geared for landscapes. Each ambience is a modification of
the respective shooting mode’s image characteristics.
(2) Vivid
The subject will look sharp and vivid. It makes the photo look more
impressive than with [Standard setting].
(3) Soft
The subject will look softer and more dainty. Good for portraits, pets,
flowers, etc.
(4) Warm
The subject will look softer with warmer colors. Good for portraits,
pets, and other subjects to which ou wnt to give a warm look.
(5) Intense
While the overall brightneligtly lowered, the subject is
emphasized for a mre inteeeling. Makes the human or living
subject stand out moe.
(6) Cool
The overall brightness is slightly lowered with a cooler color cast. A
subject in the shade will look more calm and impressive.
(7) Brighter
The picture will look brighter.
(8) Darker
The picture will look darker.
(9) Monochrome
The picture will be monochrome. You can select the monochrome
color to be black and white, sepia, or blue. When [Monochrome] is
selected, <0> will appear in the viewfinder.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
67
Shoot by Lighting or Scene Type
In the <2> (Portrait), <3> (Landscape), <4> (Close-up), and <5>
(Sports) Basic Zone modes, you can shoot while the settings match the
lighting or scene type. Normally, [Default setting] is adequate, but if the
settings match the lighting condition or scene, the picture will look more
accurate to your eye.
For Live View shooting, if you set both [Shoot by lighting or scene
type] and [Shoot by ambience selection] (p.65), you should first set
[Shoot by lighting or scene type]. This will make it easier to see the
resulting effect on the LCD monitor.
A
7 C
2
k
k
k
k
k
3
k
k
k
k
4
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
5
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
6
Lighting or scene
(1) Default setting
(2) Daylight
(3) Shade
(4) Cloudy
(5) Tungsten light
(6) Fluorescent light
(7) Sunset
k
Set the Mode Dial to any of the
following modes: <2>, <3>,
<4>, or <5>.
1
Display the Live View image.
2
With the Live View image displayed,
you can see the resulting effect.
Press the <A> button to switch to
Live View shooting.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
68
Shoot by Lighting or Scene Type
On the Quick Control screen,
3 select the lighting or scene type.
Press the <Q> button (7).
Press the <
setting] (shown in the sample screen).
Shoot by lighting or scene type
will appear on the screen’s bottom.
V> key to select [Default
[
]
Press the <U> key or turn the
<6> dial to select the desired
lighting or scene type.
X The LCD monitor will show how the
image will look with the selected
lighting or scene type.
Take the pcture.
4
To oot hile the Live View image is
diayed, press the shutter button.
o return to viewfinder shooting,
ress the <A> button to exit Live
View shooting. Then press the shutter
button completely to take the picture.
If you change the shooting mode or set
the power switch to < >, the setting
will revert back to [Default setting].
2
If you use flash, the setting will switch to [Default setting]. (However, the
shooting information will display the lighting or scene type that was set.)
If you want to set this together with [Shoot by ambience selection], set
the [Shoot by lighting or scene type] which best matches the ambience
you have set. In the case of [Sunset] for example, warm colors will
become prominent so the ambience you set might not work well.
If you don’t want the Live View image to be displayed when setting
functions, press the <Q> button after step 1. Pressing the <Q> button will
display the Quick Control screen. You can then set [Shoot by lighting or
scene type] and shoot with the viewfinder.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
69
Shoot by Lighting or Scene Type
Lighting or Scene Type Settings
(1) Default setting
The default setting.
(2) Daylight
For subjects under sunlight. Gives more natural-looking blue skies
and greenery and reproduces light-colored flowers better.
(3) Shade
For subjects in the shade. Suitable for skin tones, which may look
too bluish, and for light-colored flowers.
(4) Cloudy
For subjects under overcast skies. Makes skin tones and
landscapes, which may otherwise look dull on a cloudy day, look
warmer. Also effective for light-colored flowers.
(5) Tungsten light
For subjects lit under tungsten lightiRedces the reddish-orange
color cast caused by tungsten lighti
(6) Fluorescent light
For subjects under fluoescent ting. Suited for all types of
fluorescent lighting.
(7) Sunset
Suitable when you want to capture the sunset’s impressive colors.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
70
x Image Playback
The easiest way to playback images is explained below. For more
details on the playback procedure, see page 201.
Playback the image.
When you press the <x> button, the
1
last image captured will be displayed.
Select an image.
To view images starting with the last
2
image, press the <Y> key. To view
images starting with the first (oldest)
image, press the <Z> key.
Each timyou press the <C>
bn, thdisplay format will change.
No information
With basic information
Shooting information display
Histogram
Exit the image playback.
3
Press the <x> button to exit the
image playback and return to the
shooting settings display.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creative Shooting
In the Basic Zone modes, to prent soiled shots,
most functions are set automatiy and cannot be
changed. In the <d> (ProAE) mode, you can set
various functions anbe mcreative.
In the <d> mode, the camera sets the shutter speed and
aperture automatically to obtain a standard exposure.
The difference between the Basic Zone modes and <d> is
explained on page 268.
The functions explained in this chapter can also be used in
the <s>, <f>, and <a> modes explained in Chapter
4.
The Mmark shown on the right of the page title indicates
that the function is available only in Creative Zone modes
(p.22).
* <d> stands for Program.
* AE stands for Auto Exposure.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
73
d: Program AE
The camera automatically sets the shutter speed and aperture to suit
the subject’s brightness. This is called Program AE.
Set the Mode Dial to <d>.
1
Focus the subject.
Look through the viewfinder and aim
2
the selected AF point over the
subject. Then press the shutter button
halfway.
X The dot inside the AF point achieving
focus lights briefly in red, and the
focus confirmation light <o> in the
viewfinder’s bottom right lights (with
One t AF.
X e sutter speed and aperture will
et automatically and displayed in
thviewfinder.
Check the display.
A standard exposure will be obtained
3
as long as the shutter speed and
aperture display do not blink.
Take the picture.
4
Compose the shot and press the
shutter button completely.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
74
d: Program AE
Shooting Tips
Change the ISO speed or use the built-in flash.
To match the subject and ambient lighting level, you can change the
ISO speed (p.79) or use the built-in flash (p.90). In the <d> mode,
the built-in flash will not fire automatically. So under low light, press
the <I> (Flash) button to raise the built-in flash.
The program can be shifted. (Program shift)
After pressing the shutter button halfway, turn the <6> dial to
change the shutter speed and aperture setting combination
(program). Program shift is canceled automatically after the picture
is taken. Program shift is not possible with flash.
If the “30"” shutter speed and the maximum aperture
blink, it indicates underexposure. Increase the ISO
speed or use flash.
If the “4000” shutter speed and the minimum aperture
blink, it indicates overexposure. Decrease the ISO
speed.
Differences Between <d> and <A> (Scene Intelligent Auto)
With <A>, many functions such the AF mode, drive mode, and built-in
flash are set automatically to prevent spoiled shots. The functions you can
set are limited. With <d>, only the shutter speed and aperture are set
automatically. You can freely set the AF mode, drive mode, built-in flash,
and other functions (p.268).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
75
3 Setting the Image-recording Quality
You can select the pixel count and the image quality. Ten image-
recording quality settings are provided: 73, 83, 74, 84, 7a,
8a, b, c, 1, 1+73.
Select [Quality].
Under the [1] tab, select [Quality],
1
then press <0>.
X [Quality] will appear.
Pixel count
Select the image-recording
2 quality.
Possible shots
The respective quality’s pixel count
and number of possible shots will be
displayed to help you select the
desired quaty. Then press <0>.
Guide to Image-recording QuaSengs (Approx.)
Pixels Red File Size Possible Maximum
Quality
megapixes)
(MB)
6.4
3.2
3.4
1.7
2.2
1.1
Shots
Burst
73
83
74
84
7a
8a
570
34
High
quality
Approx. 17.9
(18M)
1120
1070
2100
1670
3180
1120
1070
2100
1670
3180
Medium
quality
Approx. 8.0
(8M)
Approx. 4.5
(4.5M)
JPEG
Low
quality
Approx. 2.5
(2.5M)
b
1.3
0.3
2780
2780
Approx. 0.35
(0.35M)
c
10780
10780
1
24.5
150
110
6
3
High
quality
Approx. 17.9
(18M)
1+73
24.5+6.4
* Figures for the file size, number of possible shots, and maximum burst are based on
Canon’s 4GB test card and testing standards (3:2 aspect ratio, ISO 100, and Standard
Picture Style). These figures will vary depending on the subject, card brand,
aspect ratio, ISO speed, Picture Style, Custom Functions, and other settings.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
76
3 Setting the Image-recording Quality
FAQ
I want to select the image-recording quality matching the paper
size for printing.
Refer to the diagram on the left when
choosing the image-recording quality. If
Paper size
A2 (42x59.4cm/16.5x23.4in.)
you want to crop the image, selecting a
higher quality (more pixels) such as 73,
83, 1, or 1+73 is recommended.
b is suitable for playing the images on a
digital photo frame. c is suitable for
emailing the image or using it on a Web
site.
73
83
1
A3 (42x29.7cm/
16.5x11.7in.)
1+73
74
84
7a
8a
b
A4 (29.7x21cm/11.7x8.3in.)
12.7x8.9cm/5.0x3.5in.
What’s the difference between 7 an8?
It indicates a different image qudue o a different compression
rate. Even with the same er f pixels, the 7 image has higher
image quality. If 8 is selecte image quality will be slightly lower,
but more images cabe saved to the card. Both b and c have 7
(Fine) quality.
I could take more shots than the number of possible shots
indicated.
Depending on the shooting conditions, you may be able to take
more shots than was indicated. It might also be fewer than indicated.
The number of possible shots displayed is only approximate.
Does the camera display the maximum burst?
The maximum burst is displayed in the viewfinder’s right side. Since
it is only a single-digit indicator 0 - 9, any number higher than 9 will
be displayed only as “9.” Note that this number will also be displayed
even when no card is installed in the camera. Be careful not to shoot
without a card in the camera.
When should I use 1?
1 images require processing with your computer. For details, see
“About 1” and “About 1+73” on the next page.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
77
3 Setting the Image-recording Quality
About 1
1 is the raw image data before it is made into 73 or other images.
Although 1 images require software like Digital Photo Professional
(provided, p.302) so they can be displayed on the computer, they also
offer flexibility for image adjustments possible only with 1. 1 is
effective when you want to precisely adjust the image yourself or shoot
an important subject.
About 1+73
1+73 records both a 1 and 73 image with a single shot. The
two images are saved to the card simultaneously. The two images will
be saved in the same folder with the same file numbers (file extension
.JPG for JPEG and .CR2 for RAW). 73 imags can be viewed or
printed even with a computer which donot ave the software
provided with the camera installed.
1 image
73image
0001 . CR2
0001 . JPG
File number
File extension
Commercially-available software might not be able to display RAW images.
Using the provided software is recommended.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
78
Z: Changing the ISO SpeedN
Set the ISO speed (image sensor’s sensitivity to light) to suit the
ambient light level. In Basic Zone modes, the ISO speed is set
automatically (p.80).
Press the <Z> button. (9)
X [ISO speed] will appear.
1
Set the ISO speed.
2
Press the <U> key or turn the
<6> dial to select the desired ISO
speed, then press <0>.
You can so set the ISO speed in the
viefindewhile turning the < > dial.
6
WAUTO] selected, the ISO speed
will be set automatically (p.80).
ISO Speed Guide
ISO Speed
Shooting Situation (No flash)
Sunny outdoors
Flash Range
100 - 400
The higher the ISO speed,
400 - 1600
Overcast skies or evening time the farther the flash range will
extend (p.90).
1600 - 6400, H
Dark indoors or night
* High ISO speeds will result in grainier images.
Under [7 Custom Functions (C.Fn)], if [2: ISO expansion] is set to [1:
On], “H” (equivalent to ISO 12800) can also be set (p.252).
Under [7 Custom Functions (C.Fn)], if [6: Highlight tone priority] is
set to [1: Enable], ISO 100 and “H” (equivalent to ISO 12800) cannot be
selected (p.254).
Shooting in high temperatures may result in images that look grainier.
Long exposures can also cause irregular colors in the image.
When you shoot at high ISO speeds, noise (banding, dots of light, etc.)
may become noticeable.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
79
Z: Changing the ISO SpeedN
ISO [AUTO]
If the ISO speed is set to [AUTO], the
actual ISO speed to be set will be
displayed when you press the shutter
button halfway. As indicated below, the
ISO speed will be set automatically to
suit the shooting mode.
Shooting Mode
A/7/C/3/4/5/6
d/s/f/a*1/8
2
ISO Speed Setting
Automatically set within ISO 100 - 3200
Automatically set within ISO 100 - 6400*2
Fixed at ISO 100
With flash
Fixed at ISO 400*3*4
*1: Fixed at ISO 400 for bulb exposures.
*2: Depends on the maximum ISO speed limit set.
*3: If fill flash results in overexposure, ISO r a hiher ISO speed will be set.
*4: If bounce flash is used with an exl Sedlite in a Basic Zone (except
<6>) mode, <d> or <8> mO 00 - 1600 (or up to the maximum
limit) will be set automaticlly.
When [AUTO] is set, the ISO speed is indicated in whole-stop
increments. However, the ISO speed is actually set in finer increments.
Therefore, in the image’s shooting information (p.226), you may find an
ISO speed like 125 or 640 displayed as the ISO speed.
In the <2> mode, the ISO speed shown in the table is actually used
even if ISO 100 is not displayed.
3 Setting the Maximum ISO Speed for ISO AutoN
For ISO Auto, you can set the maximum ISO speed limit within ISO 400 - 6400.
Under the [y] tab, select [ISO Auto],
then press <0>. Select the ISO speed,
then press <0>.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
80
A
Selecting the Subject’s Optimal Image CharacteristicsN
By selecting a Picture Style, you can obtain image characteristics
matching your photographic expression or the subject.
In Basic Zone modes, you cannot select the Picture Style.
Press the <XA> button.
1
X [Picture Style] will appear.
Select a Picture Style.
2
Press the <U> key or turn the
<6> dial to select a Picture Style,
then press <0>.
Picture Style Character
D Auto
The color tone will be adjusted to suit the scene. The colors will look
vivid, especially for blue skies, greenery, and sunsets in nature,
outdoor, and sunset scenes.
If the desired color tone is not obtained, use another Picture Style.
P Standard
The image looks vivid, sharp, and crisp. This is a general-purpose
Picture Style suitable for most scenes.
Q Portrait
For nice skin tones. The image looks softer. Good for close-up
portraits.
By changing the [Color tone] (p.113), you can adjust the skin tone.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
81
A Selecting the Subject’s Optimal Image CharacteristicsN
R Landscape
For vivid blues and greens, and very sharp and crisp images.
Effective for impressive landscapes.
S Neutral
This Picture Style is for users who prefer to process images with
their computer. For natural colors and subdued images.
U Faithful
This Picture Style is for users who prefer to process images with
their computer. When the subject is captured under a color
temperature of 5200K, the color is adjusted colorimetrically to match
the subject’s color. The image looks dull and subdued.
V Monochrome
Creates black-and-white images.
Other than with 1, the black-and-whitiage cannot be reverted to
color. If you want to later shoot ps in color, make sure the
[Monochrome] setting has en cceled. When [Monochrome] is
set, <0> will appear in wfider.
W User Def. 1-3
You can register a basic style such as [Portrait], [Landscape], a
Picture Style file, etc., and adjust it as desired (p.115). Any User
Defined Picture Style which has not been set will have the same
default settings as the [Auto] Picture Style.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
82
E: Changing the Autofocus ModeN
You can select the AF (autofocus) mode to suit the shooting conditions
or subject. In Basic Zone modes, the most suitable AF mode is set
automatically.
On the lens, set the focus mode
switch to <AF>.
1
Press the <ZE> button.
2
X [AF mode] will appear.
Selhe AF mode.
3
Pres the <U> key or turn the
6> dial to select the desired AF
mode, then press <0>.
Focus the subject.
Aim the AF point over the subject and
4
press the shutter button halfway. The
camera will then autofocus in the
selected AF mode.
One-Shot AF for Still Subjects
Suited for still subjects. When you press the shutter button
halfway, the camera will focus only once.
When focus is achieved, the dot inside the AF point achieving focus
lights briefly in red, and the focus confirmation light <o> in the
viewfinder will also light.
With evaluative metering (p.102), the exposure setting will be set at
the same time focus is achieved.
While you hold down the shutter button halfway, the focus will be
locked. You can then recompose the shot if desired.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
83
E: Changing the Autofocus ModeN
If focus cannot be achieved, the focus confirmation light <o> in the
viewfinder will blink. If this occurs, a picture cannot be taken even if the
shutter button is pressed completely. Recompose the picture and try to
focus again. Or see “Subjects Difficult to Focus” (p.87).
If [1 Beep] is set to [Disable], the beeper will not sound when focus is
achieved.
AI Servo AF for Moving Subjects
This AF mode is for moving subjects when the focusing distance
keeps changing. While you hold down the shutter button halfway,
the subject will be focused continuously.
The exposure is set at the moment the picture is taken.
When the AF point selection (p.85) is automatic, the camera first
uses the center AF point to focus. During atofocusing, if the subject
moves away from the center AF poocus tracking continues as
long as the subject is covered anher AF point.
With AI Servo AF, the beeer will nund even when focus is achieved.
Also, the focus confirmatioligh<o> in the viewfinder will not light.
AI Focus AF for Automatic Switching of AF Mode
AI Focus AF switches the AF mode from One-Shot AF to AI Servo
AF automatically if the still subject starts moving.
After the subject is focused in One-Shot AF mode, if the subject
starts moving, the camera will detect the movement and change the
AF mode automatically to AI Servo AF.
When focus is achieved in the AI Focus AF mode with the Servo mode
active, the beeper will sound continuously sofltly. However, the focus
confirmation light <o> in the viewfinder will not light.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
84
S Selecting the AF Point N
In Basic Zone modes, the camera will normally focus the closest subject
automatically. Therefore, it might not always focus your target subject.
In the <d>, <s>, <f>, and <a> modes, you can select the AF
point and use it to focus the target subject.
Press the <S> button. (9)
1
X The selected AF point will be
displayed on the LCD monitor and in
the viewfinder.
Select the AF point.
2
Press the <S> key to select the AF
point.
While loking at the viewfinder, you
can selethe AF point by turning the
<> diauntil the desired AF point
ligs in red.
hen all the AF points light up,
automatic AF point selection will be
set. The AF point will be selected
automatically to focus the subject.
Pressing <0> toggles the AF point
selection between the center AF point
and automatic AF point selection.
Focus the subject.
Aim the selected AF point over the
3
subject and press the shutter button
halfway to focus.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
85
S Selecting the AF Point N
Shooting Tips
When shooting a portrait up close, use One-Shot AF and focus
the eyes.
If you focus the eyes first, you can then recompose and the face will
remain sharp.
If it is difficult to focus, select and use the center AF point.
The center AF point is the most sensitive among the nine AF points.
To make it easier to focus a moving subject, set the camera to
automatic AF point selection and AI Servo AF (p.84).
The center AF point will first be used to focus the subject. During
autofocusing, if the subject moves away from the center AF point,
focus tracking continues as long as the subject is covered by
another AF point.
AF-Assist Beam with the Bin Flash
Under low-light conditionswhen ypress the shutter button halfway,
the built-in flash fires a brief burt of flashes. It illuminates the subject to
enable easier autofocusing.
The AF-assist beam will not be fired in the following shooting modes:
<7>, <3> and <5>.
The AF-assist beam cannot be emitted in the AI Servo AF mode.
The effective range of the AF-assist beam emitted by the built-in flash is
about 4 meters/13.1 feet.
In Creative Zone modes when you raise the built-in flash with the <I>
button (p.90), the AF-assist beam will be fired when necessary.
If you use an Extender (sold separately) and the maximum aperture
becomes smaller than f/5.6, AF shooting will not be possible (except in [Live
mode] and [uLive mode] during Live View shooting). For details, see the
Extender’s instruction manual.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
86
Subjects Difficult to Focus
Autofocus can fail to achieve focus (viewfinder’s focus confirmation light
<o> blinks) with certain subjects such as the following:
Very low-contrast subjects.
(Example: Blue sky, solid-color walls, etc.)
Subjects in very low light
Extremely backlit or reflective subjects
(Example: Car with a highly reflective body, etc.)
Near and far subjects covered by an AF point
(Example: Animal in a cage, etc.)
Repetitive patterns
(Example: Skyscraper windows, computer keyboards, etc.)
In such cases, do one of the following:
(1) With One-Shot AF, focus an object at the same distance as the
subject and lock the focus before recomposing (p.53).
(2) Set the lens focus mode switch to <MFand focus manually.
For conditions where AF can fo aceve focus with [Live mode]/[uLive
mode] during Live View shooee age 134.
MF: Manual Focusing
Set the lens focus mode switch to
<MF>.
1
2
Focus the subject.
Focus by turning the lens focusing
ring until the subject looks sharp in
Focusing ring
the viewfinder.
If you hold down the shutter button halfway during manual focusing, the AF
point achieving focus will light in red briefly, the beeper will sound, and the
focus confirmation light <o> in the viewfinder will light.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
87
i Continuous ShootingN
You can shoot up to about 3.7 shots per sec. This is effective for
shooting a child running toward you or capturing different facial
expressions.
Press the <YiQ> button.
1
2
Select <i>.
Press the <U> key or turn the
<6> dial to select continuous
shooting <i>, then press <0>.
Take the picture.
The camera shoots continuously
3
while you hold down the shutter
button completely.
Shooting Tips
Also set the AF mode (p.83) mtching the subject.
• For a moving subject
When AI Servo AF is set, focusing will be continuous during
continuous shooting.
• For still subjects
When One-Shot AF is set, the camera will focus only once during
continuous shooting.
Flash can also be used.
Since the flash will require recycling time, the continuous shooting
speed will be slower.
Under [7 Custom Functions (C.Fn)], if [5: High ISO speed noise
reduction] (p.254) is set to [2: Strong], the maximum continuous
shooting burst will greatly decrease.
In AI Servo AF mode, the continuous shooting speed may become
slightly slower depending on the subject and the lens used.
The continuous shooting speed might also decrease indoors and under
low light.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
88
j Using the Self-timer
Press the <YiQ> button.
1
2
Select the self-timer.
Press the <U> key or turn the
<6> dial to select the desired self-
timer, then press <0>.
Q : 10-sec. self-timer
The remote control can also be
used. (p.261)
l : 2-sec. self-timerN(p.122)
q : 10-sec. self-timer plus
continuous shots
Press the <
V> key to set the
number of continuous shots (2 to
10) to be taken with the self-timer.
Take piture.
3
Lok through the viewfinder, focus
e subject, then press the shutter
button completely.
X
You can check the self-timer operation with
the self-timer lamp, beeper, and countdown
display (in seconds) on the LCD monitor.
X Two seconds before the picture is taken, the self-timer lamp will stay
on and the beeper will sound faster.
With <
q>, the interval between the multiple shots may be prolonged depending on
the shooting functions settings such as the image-recording quality or flash.
After taking self-timer shots, you should check the image for proper focus and exposure (p.71).
If you will not look through the viewfinder when you press the shutter
button, attach the eyepiece cover (p.262). If stray light enters the
viewfinder when the picture is taken, it may throw off the exposure.
When using the self-timer to shoot only yourself, use focus lock (p.53) on
an object at about the same distance as where you will stand.
To cancel the self-timer after it starts, press the <YiQ> button. To cancel
the self-timer during Live View shooting, set the power switch to < >.
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
89
D Using the Built-in Flash
In indoors, low light, or backlit conditions in daylight, just raise the built-
in flash and press the shutter button to take flash pictures. In the <d>
mode, the shutter speed (1/60 sec. - 1/200 sec.) will be set
automatically to prevent camera shake.
Press the <D> button.
1
In Creative Zone modes, you can
press the <D> button anytime to take
flash pictures.
While the flash is recycling, “DbuSY”
is displayed in the viewfinder, and
[BUSYD] is displayed on the LCD
monitor.
Press the shutter button halfway.
2
In the bottoleft of the viewfinder,
check hat the <D> icon is lit.
Take thpicture.
n focus is achieved and you
3
s the shutter button completely,
the flash will fire for the picture.
Effective Flash Range
[Approx. in meters/feet]
EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS II
EF-S18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS
ISO speed
(p.79)
Wide Angle
Telephoto
100
200
1 - 3.7 / 3.3 - 12.1
1 - 5.3 / 3.3 - 17.4
1 - 7.4 / 3.3 - 24.3
1 - 10.5 / 3.3 - 34.4
1 - 14.9 / 3.3 - 48.9
1 - 21.0 / 3.3 - 68.9
1 - 29.7 / 3.3 - 97.4
1 - 42.0 / 3.3 - 137.8
1 - 2.3 / 3.3 - 7.5
1 - 3.3 / 3.3 - 10.8
1 - 4.6 / 3.3 - 15.1
1 - 6.6 / 3.3 - 21.7
1 - 9.3 / 3.3 - 30.5
1 - 13.1 / 3.3 - 43.0
1 - 18.6 / 3.3 - 61.0
1 - 26.3 / 3.3 - 86.3
400/AUTO*
800
1600
3200
6400
H: 12800
* For fill flash, the ISO speed might be set lower than ISO 400.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
90
D Using the Built-in Flash
Shooting Tips
If the subject is far away, increase the ISO speed (p.79).
By increasing the ISO speed, you can extend the flash range.
In bright light, decrease the ISO speed.
If the exposure setting in the viewfinder blinks, decrease the ISO
speed.
Detach the lens hood and keep at least 1 meter/3.3 feet away
from the subject.
If the lens has a hood attached or you are too close to the subject,
the bottom of the picture might look dark due to the obstructed flash.
For important shots, check the image on the LCD monitor to make
sure the flash exposure looks natural (not dark at the bottom).
3 Red-eye Reduction
Using the red-eye reduction lamp bre taking a flash picture can
reduce red eye. Red-eye redwil work in any shooting mode
except <7>, <3>, <5>, or >.
Under the [1] tab, select [Red-eye
reduc.], then press <0>. Select
[Enable], then press <0>.
For flash photography, when you press
the shutter button halfway, the red-eye
reduction lamp will light. Then when
you press the shutter button
completely, the picture will be taken.
The red-eye reduction feature is most effective when the subject looks at
the red-eye reduction lamp, when the room is well lit, or when you are
close to the subject.
When you press the shutter button halfway, the
scale display on the bottom of the viewfinder will
shrink and turn off. For best results, take the picture
after this scale display turns off.
The effectiveness of red-eye reduction varies depending on the subject.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Shooting
This chapter builds on Chapter nd itroduces more
ways to shoot creatively.
The first half of this chapteains how to use the <s>,
<f>, <a>, and <8> modes on the Mode Dial.
All the functions explainein Chapter 3 can also be used in
the <s>, <f>, and <a> modes.
To see which functions can be used in each shooting mode,
see page 268.
The Mmark shown on the right of the page title indicates
that the function is available only in Creative Zone modes
(p.22).
c About the Main Dial Pointer
The pointer icon <c> displayed
together with the shutter speed, aperture
setting, or exposure compensation
amount indicates that you can turn the
<6> dial to adjust the respective
setting.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
93
s
:
Action Shots
You can either freeze the action or create motion blur with the <s>
(Shutter-priority AE) mode on the Mode Dial.
* <s> stands for Time value.
Blurred motion
Frozen action
(Slow shutter speed: 1/30 sec.)
(Fast shutter speed: 1/2000 sec.)
Set the Mode Dial to <s>.
1
Se esired shutter speed.
“Shooting Tips” for advice on
setting the shutter speed.
2
Turning the <6> dial to the right
sets a faster shutter speed, and
turning it to the left sets a slower one.
Take the picture.
3
When you focus and press the
shutter button completely, the picture
will be taken at the selected shutter
speed.
Shutter Speed Display
The LCD monitor displays the shutter speed as a fraction. However, the
viewfinder displays only the denominator. Also, “0"5” indicates 0.5 sec. and
“15"” is 15 sec.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
94
s: Action Shots
Shooting Tips
To freeze the action or moving subject.
Use a fast shutter speed such as 1/4000 sec. to 1/500 sec.
To blur a running child or animal giving the impression of fast
movement.
Use a medium shutter speed such as 1/250 sec. to 1/30 sec. Follow
the moving subject through the viewfinder and press the shutter
button to take the picture. If you use a telephoto lens, hold it steady
to prevent camera shake.
How to blur a flowing river or water fountain.
Use a slow shutter speed of 1/30 sec. or slower. Use a tripod to
prevent hand-held camera shake.
Set the shutter speed so that the apture display does not
blink.
If you press the shutter buhalway and change
the shutter speed while thture is displayed,
the aperture display will also change to maintain the
same exposure (amount of light reaching the image
sensor). If you exceed the adjustable aperture
range, the aperture display will blink to indicate that
the standard exposure cannot be obtained.
If the exposure will be too dark, the maximum aperture (smallest
number) will blink. If this happens, turn the <6> dial to the left to
set a slower shutter speed or increase the ISO speed.
If the exposure will be too bright, the minimum aperture (highest
number) will blink. If this happens, turn the <6> dial to the right to
set a faster shutter speed or decrease the ISO speed.
D Using the Built-in Flash
To obtain a correct flash exposure, the flash output will be set
automatically (autoflash exposure) to match the automatically-set
aperture. The flash sync speed can be set from 1/200 sec. to 30 sec.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
95
f
:
Changing the Depth of Field
To blur the background or to make everything near and far look sharp,
set the Mode Dial to <f> (Aperture-priority AE) to adjust the depth of
field (range of acceptable focus).
* <f> stands for Aperture value which is the size of the diaphragm hole inside the lens.
Blurred background
(With a low aperture f/number: f/5.6)
Sharp foreground and background
(With a high aperture f/number: f/32)
Set the ModDial to <f>.
1
Se desired aperture.
2
higher the f/number, the wider
the depth of field where sharper focus
is obtained in both the foreground
and background.
Turning the <6> dial to the right will
set a higher f/number (smaller
aperture opening), and turning it to
the left will set a lower f/number
(larger aperture opening).
Take the picture.
3
Focus and press the shutter button
completely. The picture will be taken
with the selected aperture.
Aperture Display
The higher the f/number, the smaller the aperture opening will be. The
apertures displayed will differ depending on the lens. If no lens is attached to
the camera, “00” will be displayed for the aperture.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
96
f: Changing the Depth of Field
Shooting Tips
When using an aperture with a high f/number, note that camera
shake can occur in low light scenes.
A higher aperture f/number will make the shutter speed slower.
Under low light, the shutter speed can be as long as 30 sec. In such
cases, increase the ISO speed and hold the camera steady or use a
tripod.
The depth of field depends not only on the aperture, but also on
the lens and on the subject distance.
Since wide-angle lenses have a wide depth of field (range of
acceptable focus in front of and behind the point of focus), you need
not set a high aperture f/number to obtain a sharp picture from the
foreground to the background. On the oher hand, a telephoto lens
has a narrow depth of field.
And the closer the subject, the wer he depth of field. A farther
subject will have a wider dof eld.
Set the aperture so that thutter speed display does not
blink.
If you press the shutter button halfway and change
the aperture while the shutter speed is displayed,
the shutter speed display will also change to
maintain the same exposure (amount of light
reaching the image sensor). If you exceed the
adjustable shutter speed range, the shutter speed
display will blink to indicate that the standard
exposure cannot be obtained.
If the picture will be too dark, the “30"” (30 sec.) shutter speed
display will blink. If this happens, turn the <6> dial to the left to set
a lower aperture f/number or increase the ISO speed.
If the picture will be too bright, the “4000” (1/4000 sec.) shutter
speed display will blink. If this happens, turn the <6> dial to the
right to set a higher aperture f/number or decrease the ISO speed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
97
f: Changing the Depth of Field
D Using the Built-in Flash
To obtain a correct flash exposure, the flash output will be set
automatically to match the set aperture (autoflash exposure). The
shutter speed will be set automatically between 1/200 sec. - 30 sec. to
suit the scene’s brightness.
In low light, the main subject is exposed with the automatic flash, and
the background is exposed with a slow shutter speed set automatically.
Both the subject and background look properly exposed (automatic
slow-speed flash sync). If you are handholding the camera, keep it
steady to prevent camera shake. Using a tripod is recommended.
If you do not want a slow shutter speed to be used, set [3: Flash sync.
speed in Av mode] to [1: 1/200-1/60 sec. auto] or [2: 1/200 sec.
(fixed)] in [7 Custom Functions (C.Fn)] (p.252).
Depth of Field PreviewN
The aperture opening (diaphraganges only at the moment when
the picture is taken. Otherise, therture remains fully open.
Therefore, when you look at the scene through the viewfinder or LCD
monitor, the depth of field will look narrow.
When you press the depth-of-field
preview button, you can see the actual
depth of field before you shoot.
While looking at the Live View image (p.124) and holding down the depth-of-
field preview button, you can change the aperture and see how the depth of
field changes.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
98
a
:
Manual Exposure
You can set both the shutter speed and aperture manually as desired.
While referring to the exposure level indicator in the viewfinder, you can
set the exposure as desired. This method is called manual exposure.
* <a> stands for Manual.
Set the Mode Dial to <a>.
1
Set the shutter speed and
2 aperture.
To set the shutter speed, turn the
<6>
<6> dial.
<O> + <6>
To set the aperture, hold down the
> button and turn the < > dial.
<O
6
Standard exposure index
Exposure level mark
Focus the subject.
3
Pthe shutter button halfway.
Thexposure setting will be
spayed in the viewfinder.
The exposure level mark <h> indicates
how far the current exposure level is
from the standard exposure level.
Set the exposure and take the
4 picture.
Set the shutter speed and aperture as
desired.
If the exposure set exceeds ±2 stops from
the standard exposure, the end of the
exposure level indicator will display <
or < > in the viewfinder. (On the LCD
monitor, if the exposure level exceeds ±3
stops, the < > icon will blink at where
-3> or <+3> is displayed.)
I>
J
N
<
If [2 Auto Lighting Optimizer] (p.109) is set to any setting other than
Disable], the image may still look bright even if a darker exposure has been set.
[
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
99
a: Manual Exposure
I Using the Built-in Flash
To obtain a correct flash exposure, the flash output will be set
automatically (autoflash exposure) to match the manually-set aperture.
The flash sync speed can be set from 1/200 sec. to 30 sec. and bulb.
BULB: Bulb Exposures
A bulb exposure keeps the shutter open
for as long as you hold down the shutter
button. It can be used to photograph
fireworks, etc.
In step 2 on the preceding page, turn the
<6> dial to the left to set <BULB>.
The elapsed exposure time will be
displayed on thLCD monitor.
During the bulb exposure, do not point the lens toward the sun. The
sun’s heat can damage the camera’s internal components.
Since bulb exposures produce more noise than usual, the image might
look a little grainy.
You can reduce the noise due to long exposures by setting [4: Long exp.
noise reduction] to [1: Auto] or [2: On] in the [7 Custom Functions
(C.Fn)] (p.253).
For bulb exposures, using a tripod and Remote Switch (sold separately,
p.262) is recommended.
You can also use a remote controller (sold separately, p.261) for bulb
exposures. When you press the remote controller’s transmit button, the
bulb exposure will start immediately or 2 sec. later. Press the button
again to stop the bulb exposure.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
100
8: Automatic Depth-of-Field AE
Objects in the foreground and background will be in focus automatically.
All the AF points will function to detect the subject, and the aperture
required to attain the necessary depth of field will be set automatically.
* <8> stands for Auto-Depth of field. This mode sets the depth of field
automatically.
Set the Mode Dial to <8>.
1
Focus the subject.
2
Aim the AF points over the subjects
and press the shutter button halfway
(0).
All the subjects covered by the AF
points flahing in red will be in focus.
If us is not achieved, the picture
caot be taken.
e the picture.
3
FAQ
The aperture display in the viewfinder blinks.
The exposure is correct, but the desired depth of field cannot be
obtained. Either use a wide-angle lens or move farther away from
the subjects.
The shutter speed display in the viewfinder blinks.
If the “30"” shutter speed blinks, it means that the subject is too dark.
Increase the ISO speed. If the “4000” shutter speed blinks, it means
that the subject is too bright. Decrease the ISO speed.
A slow shutter speed has been set.
Use a tripod to steady the camera.
I want to use flash.
Flash can be used, however, the result will be the same as using the
<d> mode with flash. The desired depth of field will not be obtained.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
101
q Changing the Metering ModeN
Four methods (metering modes) to measure the subject’s brightness
are provided. Normally, evaluative metering is recommended.
In Basic Zone modes, evaluative metering is set automatically.
Select [Metering mode].
1
Under the [2] tab, select [Metering
mode], then press <0>.
Set the metering mode.
2
Select the desired metering mode,
then press <0>.
q Evaluative metering
This is an all-around metering mode suited for
portraits and even backit subjects. The camera
sets the exposure autoatically to suit the scene.
w Partial mrin
Effective he background is much brighter
thathe subject due to backlighting, etc. The gray
area in te left figure is where the brightness is
metered to obtain the standard exposure.
r Spot metering
This is for metering a specific part of the subject or
scene. The gray area in the left figure is where the
brightness is metered to obtain the standard
exposure. This metering mode is for advanced users.
e Center-weighted average metering
The brightness is metered at the center and
then averaged for the entire scene. This
metering mode is for advanced users.
With q, the exposure setting will be locked when you press the shutter
button halfway and focus is achieved. With w, r, and e, the exposure
setting is set at the moment of exposure. (The exposure setting is not locked
when you press the shutter button halfway.)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
102
Setting Exposure CompensationN
O Setting Exposure Compensation
Set exposure compensation if the exposure (without flash) does not come out
as desired. This feature can be used in Creative Zone modes (except <
a>).
You can set the exposure compensation up to ±5 stops in 1/3-stop increments.
Making it brighter:
Hold down the <O> button and
turn the <6> dial to the right.
(Increased exposure)
Making it darker:
Hold down the <O> button and
turn the <6> dial to the left.
Increased exposure for a brighter image
(Decreased exposure)
X As showin the figure, the exposure
les dislayed on the LCD monitor
anin the viewfinder.
fter taking the picture, cancel the
Decreased exposure for a darker image
exposure compensation by setting
it back to 0.
Dark exposure
Increased exposure for a brighter image
The exposure compensation amount displayed in the viewfinder goes up
to only ±2 stops. If the exposure compensation amount exceeds ±2
stops, the end of the exposure level indicator will display <I> or <J>.
The exposure compensation can also be set with [2 Expo. comp./
AEB] (p.105). If you will set exposure compensation exceeding ±2 stops,
you should use [2 Expo. comp./AEB] to set it.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
103
Setting Exposure CompensationN
y Flash Exposure Compensation
Set flash exposure compensation if the flash exposure of the subject
does not come out as desired. You can set the flash exposure
compensation up to ±2 stops in 1/3-stop increments.
Press the <Q> button. (7)
1
X The Quick Control screen will appear
(p.41).
Select [y].
Press the <S> key to select [y*].
X [Flash exposure comp.] will be
2
displayed ahe bottom.
Set the sh exposure
3 cenation amount.
ake the flash exposure brighter,
turn the <6> dial to the right.
To make it darker, turn the <6> dial
to the left. (Decreased exposure)
X When you press the shutter button
halfway, the <y> icon will appear in
the viewfinder.
After taking the picture, cancel the
flash exposure compensation by
setting it back to 0.
If [2 Auto Lighting Optimizer] (p.109) is set to any setting other than
[Disable], the image may look bright even if a decreased exposure
compensation or decreased flash exposure compensation has been set.
You can also set flash exposure compensation with [Built-in flash func.
setting] in [1 Flash control] (p.181).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
104
3 Auto Exposure BracketingN
This feature takes exposure compensation a step further by varying the
exposure automatically (up to ±2 stops in 1/3-stop increments) with
three shots as shown below. You can then choose the best exposure.
This is called AEB (Auto Exposure Bracketing).
Darker exposure
Brighter exposure
Standard exposure
(Decreased exposure)
(Increased exposure)
Select [Expo. comp./AEB].
Under th[2] tab, select [Expo.
cop./AB], then press <0>.
1
et te AEB amount.
urn the <6> dial to set the AEB
amount.
2
Press the <U> key to set the
exposure compensation amount. If
AEB is combined with exposure
compensation, AEB will be applied
centering on the exposure
AEB amount
compensation amount.
Press <0> to set it.
When you press the <M> button
to exit the menu, the AEB level will be
displayed on the LCD monitor.
Take the picture.
3
Focus and press the shutter button
completely. The three bracketed
shots will be taken in this sequence:
Standard exposure, decreased
exposure, and increased exposure.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
105
3 Auto Exposure BracketingN
Canceling AEB
Follow steps 1 and 2 to turn off the AEB amount display.
The AEB setting will also be canceled automatically if the power
switch is set to <2>, flash recycling is completed, etc.
Shooting Tips
Using AEB with continuous shooting:
If <i> continuous shooting (p.88) has been set and you press the
shutter button completely, the three bracketed shots will be taken
continuously in this sequence: Standard exposure, decreased
exposure, and increased exposure.
Using AEB with <u> single shooting.
Press the shutter button three times to takthe three bracketed
shots. The three bracketed shots will be eosed in the following
sequence: Standard exposure, deced eposure, and increased
exposure.
Using AEB with the slf-timremote control (sold
separately).
With the self-timer or remote control (<Q> or <l>), you can take
three continuous shots after a 10-sec. or 2-sec. delay. With <q>
(p.89) set, the number of continuous shots will be three times the
number set.
Neither flash nor bulb exposures can be used with AEB.
If [2 Auto Lighting Optimizer] (p.109) is set to any setting other than
[Disable], the AEB’s effect might be minimal.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
106
A Locking the ExposureN
You can lock the exposure when the area of focus is to be different from
the exposure metering area or when you want to take multiple shots at
the same exposure setting. Press the <A> button to lock the exposure,
then recompose and take the shot. This is called AE lock. It is effective
for backlit subjects.
Focus the subject.
Press the shutter button halfway.
X The exposure setting will be
1
displayed.
Press the <A> button. (0)
2
X The <A> icon lights in the viewfinder
to indicate that the exposure setting is
locked (AE lock).
Each timyou press the <A> button,
it s the current autoexposure
seng.
Recompose and take the picture.
3
If you want to maintain the AE lock
while taking more shots, hold down
the <A> button and press the shutter
button to take another shot.
AE Lock Effects
AF Point Selection Method (p.85)
Automatic Selection Manual Selection
Metering Mode
(p.102)
AE lock is applied at the AF AE lock is applied at the
point that achieved focus. selected AF point.
q*
AE lock is applied at the center AF point.
wre
*
When the lens’ focus mode switch is set to <MF>, AE lock is applied at the center AF point.
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
107
A Locking the Flash ExposureN
If the subject is on the side of the frame and you use flash, the subject
may turn out to be too bright or dark depending on the background, etc.
This is when you should use FE lock. After setting the proper flash
exposure for the subject, you can recompose (put the subject toward
the side) and shoot. This feature can also be used with a Canon EX-
series Speedlite.
* FE stands for Flash Exposure.
Press the <D> button.
1
X The built-in flash will rise.
Press the shutter button halfway and
look in the viewfinder to check that
the <D> icon is lit.
Focus the subject.
2
3
Press t<A> button. (8)
Spot metering circle
im tspot-metering circle over the
ectthen press the <A> button.
X flash will fire a preflash and the
required flash output is calculated
and retained in memory.
X In the viewfinder, “FEL” is displayed
for a moment and <d> will light.
Each time you press the <A> button, a
preflash is fired and the required flash output
is calculated and retained in memory.
Take the picture.
4
Compose the shot and press the
shutter button completely.
X The flash is fired when the picture is
taken.
If the subject is too far away and beyond the effective range of the flash, the
<D> icon will blink. Get closer to the subject and repeat steps 2 to 4.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
108
3
Correcting the Brightness and Contrast AutomaticallyN
If the image comes out dark or the contrast is low, the brightness and
contrast can be corrected automatically. This feature is called Auto
Lighting Optimizer. The default setting is [Standard]. With JPEG images,
the correction is done when the image is captured. For RAW images, it can
be corrected with Digital Photo Professional (provided software, p.302).
Select [Auto Lighting Optimizer].
Under the [2] tab, select [Auto
1
Lighting Optimizer], then press
<0>.
Select the setting.
Select the desired setting, then press
2
<0>.
Take the pcture.
Thimawill be recorded with the
3
bness and contrast corrected if
ecessary.
Without correction
With correction
Under [7 Custom Functions (C.Fn)], if [6: Highlight tone priority] is
set to [1: Enable], the Auto Lighting Optimizer will be set automatically to
[Disable] and you cannot change this setting.
Depending on the shooting conditions, noise might increase.
If a setting other than [Disable] is set and you use exposure
compensation, flash exposure compensation, or manual exposure to
darken the exposure, the image might still come out bright. If you want a
darker exposure, set [Auto Lighting Optimizer] to [Disable] first.
In Basic Zone modes, [Standard] is set automatically.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
109
3 Correcting the Image’s Dark Corners
Due to the lens characteristics, the four corners of the picture might look
darker. This phenomenon is called lens light fall-off or drop in peripheral
illumination and can be corrected automatically. The default setting is
[Enable]. With JPEG images, the correction is done when the image is
captured. For RAW images, it can be corrected with Digital Photo
Professional (provided software, p.302).
Select [Peripheral illumin.
correct.].
Under the [1] tab, select
[Peripheral illumin. correct.], then
press <0>.
1
Select the setting.
2
On the scren, check that
[Correction data available] is
dispd for he attached lens.
Corection data not available] is
ayed, see “About the Lens
Correction Data” on the next page.
Select [Enable], then press <0>.
Take the picture.
The image will be recorded with the
3
corrected peripheral illumination.
Correction disabled
Correction enabled
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
110
3 Correcting the Image’s Dark Corners
About the Lens Correction Data
The camera already contains lens peripheral illumination correction
data for approx. 25 lenses. In step 2, if you select [Enable], the
peripheral light correction will be applied automatically for any lens
whose correction data has been registered in the camera.
With EOS Utility (provided software, p.302), you can check which
lenses have their correction data registered in the camera. You can also
register the correction data for unregistered lenses. For details, see the
Software Instruction Manual (CD-ROM) for EOS Utility (p.304).
For JPEG images aready captured, lens peripheral illumination
correction cannot be applied.
Depending on shooting conditions, noise might appear on the image
periphery.
When using a non-Canon lens, setting the correction to [Disable] is
recommended, even if [Correction data available] is displayed.
Lens peripheral light correction is also applied when an Extender is
attached.
If the correction data for the attached lens has not been registered to the
camera, the result will be the same as when the correction is set to
[Disable].
The correction amount applied will be slightly lower than the maximum
correction amount settable with Digital Photo Professional (provided
software).
If the lens does not have distance information, the correction amount will
be lower.
The higher the ISO speed, the lower the correction amount will be.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
111
A Customizing Image CharacteristicsN
You can customize a Picture Style by adjusting individual parameters
like [Sharpness] and [Contrast]. To see the resulting effects, take test
shots. To customize [Monochrome], see page 114.
Press the <XA> button.
1
Select a Picture Style.
2
Select a Picture Style, then press the
<C> button.
X The Detail set. screen will appear.
Select a parameter.
3
Select a parmeter such as
[Shaess]then press <0>.
Set the parameter.
4
Press the <U> key to adjust the
parameter as desired, then press
<0>.
Press the <M> button to save
the adjusted parameters. The Picture
Style selection screen will reappear.
X Any parameter settings different from
the default will be displayed in blue.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
112
A Customizing Image CharacteristicsN
Parameter Settings and Effects
Sharpness
Adjusts the sharpness of the image.
To make it less sharp, set it toward the E end. The closer it is to E,
the softer the image will look.
To make it sharper, set it toward the F end. The closer it is to F, the
sharper the image will look.
Contrast
Adjusts the image contrast and the vividness of colors.
To decrease the contrast, set it toward the minus end. The closer it is
to G, the blander the image will look.
To increase the contrast, set it toward the plus end. The closer it is to
H, the crisper the image will look.
Saturation
The image’s color saturation be ajusted.
To decrease the color satun, et it toward the minus end. The
closer it is to G, the more d the colors will look.
To increase the colosaturation, set it toward the plus end. The
closer it is to H, the boldr the colors will look.
Color tone
The skin tones can be adjusted.
To make the skin tone redder, set it toward the minus end. The
closer it is to G, the redder the skin tone will look.
To make the skin tone less red, set it toward the plus end. The closer
it is to H, the more yellow the skin tone will look.
By selecting [Default set.] in step 3, you can revert the respective
Picture Style to its default parameter settings.
To shoot with the Picture Style you modified, follow step 2 on page 81 to
select the modified Picture Style and then shoot.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
113
A Customizing Image CharacteristicsN
V Monochrome Adjustment
For Monochrome, you can also set [Filter effect] and [Toning effect] in
addition to [Sharpness] and [Contrast] explained on the preceding
page.
kFilter Effect
With a filter effect applied to a
monochrome image, you can make
white clouds or green trees stand out
more.
Filter
Sample Effcts
N: None
Normal black-and-white image with filter effects.
The blue sky will look more al, anthe white clouds will look
crisper.
Ye: Yellow
Or: Orange
R: Red
The blue sky will look darker. The sunset will look more
brilliant.
The blue sky willooquite dark. Fall leaves will look crisper and
brighter.
Skin tones and lips will look fine. Tree leaves will look crisper and
brighter.
G: Green
Increasing the [Contrast] will make the filter effect more pronounced.
lToning Effect
By applying a toning effect, you can
create a monochrome image in that
color. It can make the image look more
impressive.
The following can be selected: [N:None],
[S:Sepia], [B:Blue], [P:Purple] or
[G:Green].
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
114
A
Registering Preferred Image CharacteristicsN
You can select a base Picture Style such as [Portrait] or [Landscape],
adjust its parameters as desired and register it under [User Def. 1],
[User Def. 2], or [User Def. 3].
You can create Picture Styles whose parameter settings such as
sharpness and contrast are different. You can also adjust the
parameters of a Picture Style which has been registered to the camera
with EOS Utility (provided software, p.302).
Press the <XA> button.
1
Select [User Def.].
2
Select [User Def. *], then press the
<C> button.
X The Detail set. screen will appear.
ss <0>.
ith [Picture Style] selected, press
3
<0>.
Select the base Picture Style.
4
Press the <V> key to select the
base Picture Style, then press <0>.
To adjust the parameters of a Picture
Style which has been registered to
the camera with EOS Utility (provided
software), select the Picture Style
here.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
115
A Registering Preferred Image CharacteristicsN
Select a parameter.
Select a parameter such as
[Sharpness], then press <0>.
5
Set the parameter.
6
Press the <U> key to adjust the
parameter as desired, then press
<0>.
For details, see “Customizing Image
Characteristics” on pages 112-114.
Press the <M> button to register
the mified Picture Style. The
PictuStyle selection screen will
reappear.
X base Picture Style will be
indicated on the right of [User Def. *].
If a Picture Style has already been registered under [User Def. *],
changing the base Picture Style in step 4 will nullify the parameter
settings of the registered Picture Style.
If you execute [Clear all camera settings] (p.176), all the [User Def. *]
settings will revert to the default. Any Picture Style registered via EOS
Utility (provided software) will have only its modified parameters reverted
to the default setting.
To shoot with a registered Picture Style, follow step 2 on page 81 to select
[User Def. *] and then shoot.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
116
B: Matching the Light SourceN
The function adjusting the color tone so that white objects look white in
the picture is called white balance (WB). Normally, the <Q> (Auto)
setting will obtain the correct white balance. If natural-looking colors
cannot be obtained with <Q>, you can select the white balance to
match the light source or set it manually by shooting a white object.
Press the <WB> button.
1
X [White balance] will appear.
Select the white balance.
Press the <U> key or turn the
2
<6> dial to select the desired white
balance, then press <0>.
The “Approx. ****K” (K: Kelvin)
displayefor the following white
balance ettings <W>, <E>,
<>, <Y> or <U> is the
resective color temperature.
O Custom White Balance
Custom white balance enables you to manually set the white balance
for a specific light source for better accuracy. Do this procedure under
the actual light source to be used.
Photograph a white object.
1
The plain, white object should fill the
spot metering circle.
Focus manually and set the standard
exposure for the white object.
You can set any white balance.
Spot metering circle
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
117
B: Matching the Light SourceN
Select [Custom White Balance].
2
Under the [2] tab, select [Custom
White Balance], then press <0>.
X The custom white balance selection
screen will appear.
Import the white balance data.
Select the image that was captured in
step 1, then press <0>.
3
X On the dialog screen which appears,
select [OK] and the data will be
imported.
When the menu reappears, press the
<M> bton to exit the menu.
Select custom white balance.
4
ss he <WB> button.
ct [O], then press <0>.
If the exposure obtained in step 1 is way off, a correct white balance
might not be obtained.
An image captured while the Picture Style was set to [Monochrome]
(p.82) or an image processed with a Creative filter cannot be selected in
step 3.
Instead of a white object, an 18% gray card (commercially available) can
produce a more accurate white balance.
The personal white balance registered with EOS Utility (provided
software, p.302) will be registered under <O>. If you do step 3, the data
for the registered personal white balance will be erased.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
118
2
Adjusting the Color Tone for the Light SourceN
You can correct the white balance that has been set. This adjustment
will have the same effect as using a commercially-available color
temperature conversion filter or color compensating filter. Each color
can be corrected to one of nine levels.
This is for advanced users who are familiar with using color temperature
conversion or color compensating filters.
White Balance Correction
Select [WB Shift/BKT].
Under the [2] tab, select [WB Shift/
BKT], then press <0>.
X The WB correction/WB bracketing
screen will appear.
1
Set whte balance correction.
2
Prs the <S> key to move the “ ”
ark to the desired position.
B is for blue, A is amber, M is
magenta, and G is green. The color in
the respective direction will be
Sample setting: A2, G1
corrected.
On the upper right, “Shift” indicates
the direction and correction amount.
Pressing the <C> button will
cancel all the [WB Shift/BKT]
settings.
Press <0> to exit the setting and
return to the menu.
During the white balance correction, <2> will be displayed in the
viewfinder and on the LCD monitor.
One level of the blue/amber correction is equivalent to 5 mireds of a color
temperature conversion filter. (Mired: Measuring unit indicating the
density of a color temperature conversion filter.)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
119
2 Adjusting the Color Tone for the Light SourceN
White Balance Auto Bracketing
With just one shot, three images having a different color balance can be
recorded simultaneously. Based on the color temperature of the current white
balance setting, the image will be bracketed with a blue/amber bias or
magenta/green bias. This is called white balance bracketing (WB-BKT). White
balance bracketing is possible up to ±3 levels in single-level increments.
Set the white balance bracketing amount.
In step 2 for white balance correction,
when you turn the < > dial, the “ ”
mark on the screen will change to “
6
”
(3 points). Turning the dial to the right sets
the B/A bracketing, and turning it to the
left sets the MG bracketing.
B/A bias ±3 levels
X
On the ght, “racket” indicates the
brackdirection and correction amount.
sig the <C> button will cancel
e [WB Shift/BKT] settings.
Press <0> to exit the setting and
return to the menu.
Bracketing Sequence
The images will be bracketed in the following sequence: 1. Standard
white balance, 2. Blue (B) bias, and 3. Amber (A) bias, or 1. Standard
white balance, 2. Magenta (M) bias, and 3. Green (G) bias.
During WB bracketing, the maximum burst for continuous shooting will be lower and
the number of possible shots will also decrease to one-third the normal number.
You can also set white balance correction and AEB (p.105) together with
white balance bracketing. If you set AEB in combination with white balance
bracketing, a total of nine images will be recorded for a single shot.
Since three images are recorded for one shot, the card will take longer to
record the shot.
“BKT” stands for Bracketing.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
120
3
Setting the Color Reproduction RangeN
The range of reproducible colors is called the color space. With this
camera, you can set the color space to sRGB or Adobe RGB for
captured images. For normal shooting, sRGB is recommended.
In Basic Zone modes, sRGB is set automatically.
Select [Color space].
1
Under the [2] tab, select [Color
space], then press <0>.
Set the desired color space.
2
Select [sRGB] or [Adobe RGB], then
press <0>.
About Adobe RGB
This color space is mainly uscommercial printing and other
industrial uses. This seting is nrecommended if you do not know
about image processing, Adbe RGB, and Design rule for Camera File
System 2.0 (Exif 2.21).
The image will look very subdued in a sRGB personal computer
environment and with printers not compatible with Design rule for
Camera File System 2.0 (Exif 2.21). Post-processing of the image with
software will therefore be required.
If the image is captured with the color space set to Adobe RGB, the file
name will start with “_MG_” (first character is an underscore).
The ICC profile is not appended. See explanations about the ICC profile
in the Software Instruction Manual (p.304) in the CD-ROM.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
121
Mirror Lock-up to Reduce Camera ShakeN
The camera’s mechanical shake caused by the reflex mirror action can
blur images taken with a super telephoto lens or close-up (macro) lens.
In such cases, mirror lockup is effective.
Mirror lockup is enabled by setting [8: Mirror lockup] to [1: Enable]
in the [7 Custom Functions (C.Fn)] (p.255).
1
Focus the subject, then press the shutter button completely.
2 XPreTshse tmhierrosrhwuiltltsewrinbguuttpo.n completely again.
X The picture is taken and the mirror goes back down.
After taking the picture, set [8: Mirror lockup] to [0: Disable].
Shooting Tips
Using the self-timer <Q> <l> with mrror lockup.
When you press the shutter button compleely, the mirror locks up,
then the picture is taken 10 sec. or c. laer.
Remote control shooting.
Since you do not touch he cawhen the picture is taken, remote
control shooting togethr with mirror lockup can further prevent
camera shake (p.261). With Remote Controller RC-6 (sold
separately) set to a 2-sec. delay, press the transmit button and the
mirror will lockup before the picture is taken 2 sec. later.
In very bright light such as at the beach or a ski slope on a sunny day,
take the picture promptly after mirror lockup.
Do not point the camera toward the sun. The sun’s heat can damage the
camera’s internal components.
If you use the self-timer and mirror lockup in combination with a bulb exposure,
keep pressing the shutter button completely (self-timer delay time + bulb
exposure time). If you let go of the shutter button during the self-timer
countdown, there will be a shutter-release sound, but no picture will be taken.
Even if <i> (Continuous shooting) has been set, single shooting will take effect.
If 30 seconds elapse after the mirror has locked up, it will go back down
automatically. Pressing the shutter button completely again locks up the
mirror again.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
122
Shooting with the LCD Monitor
(Live View Shooting)
You can shoot while viewing the age on the camera’s
LCD monitor. This is called “Liview shooting”.
Live View shooting is effectr still subjects which do
not move.
If you handhold the camera and shoot while viewing the
LCD monitor, camera shake can cause blurred images.
Using a tripod is recommended.
About Remote Live View Shooting
With EOS Utility (provided software, p.302) installed in your
computer, you can connect the camera to the computer and shoot
remotely while viewing the computer screen. For details, see the
Software Instruction Manual (p.304) in the CD-ROM.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
123
AShooting with the LCD Monitor
Display the Live View image.
1
Press the <A> button.
X The Live View image will appear on
the LCD monitor.
The Live View image will closely
reflect the brightness level of the
actual image you capture.
Focus the subject.
2
3
When you press the shutter button
halfway, the camera will focus with
the current AF mode (p.131-137).
Take the pictre.
Prese shutter button completely.
X piture will be taken and the
ured image is displayed on the
LCD monitor.
X After the image review ends, the
camera will return to Live View
shooting automatically.
Press the <A> button to exit Live
View shooting.
The image’s field of view is approx. 99% (when the image-recording
quality is set to JPEG 73).
The metering mode will be fixed to evaluative metering for Live View
shooting.
In Creative Zone modes, you can check the depth of field by pressing the
depth-of-field preview button.
During continuous shooting, the exposure set for the first shot will also
be applied to subsequent shots.
Using <8> will be the same as using <d>.
You can also use a remote controller (sold separately, p.261) for Live
View shooting.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
124
AShooting with the LCD Monitor
Enabling Live View Shooting
Set [Live View shoot.] to [Enable].
In Basic Zone modes, [Live View
shoot.] will be displayed under [2], and
in Creative Zone modes, it will be
displayed under [z].
Battery Life with Live View Shooting [Approx. number of shots]
Shooting Conditions
Temperature
No Flash
200
50% Flash Use
At 23°C / 73°F
At 0°C / 32°F
180
150
170
The figures above are based on a fularged Battery Pack LP-E8 and CIPA
(Camera & Imaging Products iatn) testing standards.
With a fully-charged Battery PE8continuous Live View shooting is
possible as for approx. 1 hr. 30 at 23°C / 73°F.
During Live View shooting, do not point the lens toward the sun. The
sun’s heat can damage the camera’s internal components.
Cautions for using Live View shooting are on pages 139-140.
When flash is used, there will be two shutter sounds, but only one shot
will be taken.
If the camera is not operated for a prolonged period, the power will turn
off automatically as set with [5 Auto power off] (p.167). If [5 Auto
power off] is set to [Off], the Live View function will terminate
automatically after 30 min. (camera power remains on).
With the AV cable (provided) or HDMI cable (sold separately), you can
display the Live View image on a TV (p.218, 221).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
125
AShooting with the LCD Monitor
About the Information Display
Each time you press the <C> button, the information display will
change.
AF mode
• d : Live mode
AF point (Quick mode)
Magnifying frame
Histogram
• c
:
Face detection Live mode
• f: Quick mode
Shooting mode
Eye-Fi card
Drive mode
transmission
status
White balance
Auto Lighting
Optimizer
FEB
AEB
Image-recording
quality
Exposure
simulation
Built-in flash
function
Battery check
AE lock
r Flash-ready
bFlash off
Highlight tone
priority
y Flash exposure
compensation
ISO speed
0 External flash exposure
compensation
Possible shots
Exposure level indicator/
AEB range
Shutter speed
Picture Style
Aperture
When <g> is displayed in white, it indicates that the Live View image
brightness is close to what the captured image will look like.
If <g> is blinking, it indicates that the Live View image is not being
displayed at the suitable brightness due to low- or bright-light conditions.
However, the actual image recorded will reflect the exposure setting.
If flash is used or bulb is set, the <g> icon and histogram will be
grayed out (for your reference). The histogram might not be properly
displayed in low- or bright-light conditions.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
126
AShooting with the LCD Monitor
Final Image Simulation
The final image simulation reflects the effects of the Picture Style, white
balance, etc., in the Live View image so you can see what the captured
image will look like.
During shooting, the Live View image will automatically reflect the
function settings listed below.
Final image simulation during Live View shooting
Picture Style
* All parameters such as sharpness, contrast, color saturation, and color tone
will be reflected.
White balance
White balance correction
Shoot by ambience selection
Shoot by lighting or scene type
Exposure
Depth of field (With depth-ield review button ON)
Auto Lighting Optimizer
Peripheral illuminatin corren
Highlight tone priority
Aspect ratio (Image area confirmation)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
127
Shooting Function Settings
Function settings particular to Live View shooting are explained here.
QQuick Control
While the image is displayed on the LCD monitor in Creative Zone
modes, pressing the <Q> button will enable you to set the AF mode,
drive mode, white balance, Picture Style, Auto Lighting Optimizer,
image-recording quality, and built-in flash settings. In Basic Zone
modes, you can set the AF mode and the settings shown in the table on
page 64.
Press the <Q> button.
1
X The functions settable with Quick
Control will appear on the left of the
screen.
If the AF mode is <f>, the AF
poinill alo be displayed. You can
so ect the AF point.
Sa function and set it.
2
Press the <V> key to select a
function.
X The selected function and Feature
guide (p.48) will appear.
Press the <U> key or turn the
<6> dial to change the setting.
Pressing <0> will display the
respective function’s setting screen.
In Creative Zone modes, you can set the ISO speed by pressing the <Z>
button.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
128
zMenu Function Settings
The menu options below are displayed.
In Basic Zone modes, the Live View
menu options will be displayed under
[2], and in Creative Zone modes, they
will be displayed under [z].
Live View shooting
You can set Live View shooting to [Enable] or [Disable].
AF mode
You can select [Live mode] (p.131), [uLive mode] (p.132), or
[Quick mode] (p.136).
Grid display
With [Grid 1l] or [Grid 2m], you cadisplay grid lines. It can
help you level the camera verticor hrizontally.
Aspect ratioN
The image’s aspect ratio set to [3:2], [4:3], [16:9], or [1:1].
The following aspecratios be indicated with lines on the Live
View image: [4:3] [169] [:1].
JPEG images will be saved with the set aspect ratio.
RAW images will always be saved with the [3:2] aspect ratio. Since
the aspect ratio information is appended to the RAW image, the
image will be generated in the respective aspect ratio when you
process the RAW image with the provided software. In the case of
the [4:3], [16:9], and [1:1] aspect ratios, the aspect-ratio lines will
appear during image playback, but the lines are not actually drawn
on the image.
The settings for these menu options will apply only to Live View
shooting. They do not take effect during viewfinder shooting.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
129
zMenu Function Settings
Aspect Ratio and Pixel Count
Quality
3:2
4:3
16:9
1:1
3
5184x3456
4608x3456
5184x2912*
3456x3456
(18.0 megapixels) (16.0 megapixels) (15.1 megapixels) (11.9 megapixels)
1
3456x2304 3072x2304 3456x1944 2304x2304
4
(8.0 megapixels) (7.0 megapixels) (6.7 megapixels) (5.3 megapixels)
2592x1728 2304x1728 2592x1456* 1728x1728
(4.5 megapixels) (4.0 megapixels) (3.8 megapixels) (3.0 megapixels)
1920x1280 1696x1280* 1920x1080 1280x1280
(2.5 megapixels) (2.2 megapixels) (2.1 megapixels) (1.6 megapixels)
720x480 640x480 720x400* 480x480
(350,000 pixels) (310,000 pixels) (290,000 pixels) (230,000 pixels)
a
b
c
Asterisked image-recording qualities do not eactly match the set aspect
ratio.
The image area displayed for asteriimag-recording qualities is
slightly larger than the recorded rea. eck the captured images on the
LCD monitor when shooting.
If you use a different cmera to tly print images shot with this
camera in the 1:1 aspet ratio, the images might not be correctly printed.
Metering timerN
You can change how long the exposure setting is displayed (AE lock
time). This option is not displayed in Basic Zone modes. (Metering
timer is fixed at 16 sec.)
If you select [yDust Delete Data], [6 Sensor cleaning], [7 Clear
settings], or [7 Firmware Ver.], the Live View shooting will terminate.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
130
Changing the Autofocus Mode
Selecting the AF Mode
The AF modes available are [Live mode], [uLive mode] (face
detection, p.132), and [Quick mode] (p.136).
If you want to achieve precise focus, set the lens focus mode switch to
<MF>, magnify the image, and focus manually (p.138).
Select the AF mode.
Under the [z] tab, select [AF mode]
([2] tab in Basic Zone modes).
Select the desired AF mode, then
press <0>.
While the Live View image is
displaye, you can press the <Q>
button to select the AF mode on the
QControl screen (p.128).
Live Mode: d
The image sensor is used to focus. Although AF is possible with the
Live View image displayed, the AF operation will take longer than
with the Quick mode. Also, achieving focus may be more difficult than
with the Quick mode.
Display the Live View image.
Press the <A> button.
X The Live View image will appear on
the LCD monitor.
1
X The AF point < > will appear.
Move the AF point.
Press the <S> key to move the AF
point to where you want to focus (it
cannot go to the edges of the picture).
To return the AF point to the center,
press the <0> or <L> button.
2
AF point
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
131
Changing the Autofocus Mode
Focus the subject.
3
Aim the AF point over the subject and
press the shutter button halfway.
X When focus is achieved, the AF point
will turn green and the beeper will
sound.
X If focus is not achieved, the AF point
will turn orange.
Take the picture.
4
Check the focus and exposure, then
press the shutter button completely to
take the picture (p.124).
u(Face detection) Live Mc
With the same AF method s the Live mode, human faces are detected
and focused. Have the target person face the camera.
Display the Live View image.
Press the <A> button.
X The Live View image will appear on
the LCD monitor.
1
When a face is detected, the <p>
frame will appear over the face to be
focused.
If multiple faces are detected, <q>
will be displayed. Press the <U>
key to move the <q> frame over
the desired target face.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
132
Changing the Autofocus Mode
Focus the subject.
2
3
Press the shutter button halfway and
the camera will focus the face
covered by the <p> frame.
X When focus is achieved, the AF point
will turn green and the beeper will
sound.
X If focus is not achieved, the AF point
will turn orange.
If a face cannot be detected, the AF
point < > will be displayed and AF
will be executed at the center.
Take the picture.
Check the focus and exposure, then
press thshutter button completely to
tahe piture (p.124).
If the focus is way off, face detection will not be possible. If the lens
enables manual focusing even while the lens focus mode switch is set to
<f>, turn the focusing ring to attain rough focus. The face will then be
detected and <p> will be displayed.
An object other than a human face might be detected as a face.
Face detection will not work if the face is very small or large in the
picture, too bright or too dark, titled horizontally or diagonally, or partially
hidden.
The <p> focusing frame might cover only part of the face.
When you press the <0> or <L> button, the AF mode will switch to the
Live mode (p.131). You can press the <S> key to move the AF point.
Press the <0> or <L> button again to return to the u(face detection)
Live mode.
Since AF is not possible with a face detected near the edge of the
picture, the <p> will be grayed out. Then if you press the shutter button
halfway, the center AF point < > will be used to focus.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
133
Changing the Autofocus Mode
Live Mode and
AF operation
u
(Face Detection) Live Mode Notes
Focusing will take slightly longer.
Even when focus has been achieved, pressing the shutter button
halfway will focus again.
The image brightness may change during and after the AF
operation.
If the light source changes while the Live View image is displayed,
the screen might flicker and focusing may be difficult. If this
happens, stop the Live View shooting and autofocus under the
actual light source first.
If you press the <u> button in the Live mode, the image will be
magnified at the AF point. If focusing is difficult in the magnified view,
return to the normal view and autofocus. Note that the AF speed
may differ between the normal and gnifid views.
If you autofocus in the Live mode’s mal view and then magnify
the image, the focus might b
In the uLive mode, pressing u> button will not magnify the
image.
In the Live mode or u(face detection) Live mode, if you shoot a
peripheral subject and it is slightly out of focus, aim the center AF point
over the subject to focus, then take the picture.
The AF-assist beam will not be emitted. However, if an EX-series
Speedlite (sold separately) equipped with a LED light is used, the LED
light will turn on for AF-assist when necessary in the Live mode and u
(face detection) Live mode.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
134
Changing the Autofocus Mode
Shooting conditions which can make focusing difficult:
Low-contrast subjects such as the blue sky and solid-color, flat
surfaces.
Subjects in low light.
Stripes and other patterns where there is contrast only in the
horizontal direction.
Under a light source whose brightness, color, or pattern keeps
changing.
Night scenes or points of light.
Under fluorescent lighting or when the image flickers.
Extremely small subjects.
Subjects at the edge of the picture.
Subjects strongly reflecting light.
The AF point covers both a near and faraway subject (such as an
animal in a cage).
Subjects which keep moving withthe F point and cannot keep
still due to camera shake or subblur.
A subject approaching or g way from the camera.
Autofocusing while he subs way out of focus.
Soft focus effect is apliewith a soft focus lens.
A special effects filter is used.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
135
Changing the Autofocus Mode
Quick Mode: f
The dedicated AF sensor is used to focus in One-Shot AF mode (p.83),
using the same AF method as with viewfinder shooting.
Although you can focus the target area quickly, the Live View image
will be interrupted momentarily during the AF operation.
AF point
Display the Live View image.
1
Press the <A> button.
X The Live View image will appear on
the LCD monitor.
The small boxes on the screen are
the AF points, and the larger box is
the magnifying frame.
Magnifying frame
Select AF point. N
2
s the <Q> button (7) to
ay the Quick Control screen.
X The settable functions will be
displayed on the left of the screen.
Press the <V> key to make the AF
point selectable.
Turn the <6> dial to select the AF
point.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
136
Changing the Autofocus Mode
Focus the subject.
3
Aim the AF point over the subject and
press the shutter button halfway.
X The Live View image will turn off, the
reflex mirror will go back down, and
AF will be executed.
X When focus is achieved, the AF point
which achieved focus will turn green
and the Live View image will
reappear.
X If focus is not achieved, the AF point
will turn orange and blink.
Take the picture.
4
Check thfocus and exposure, then
pthe hutter button completely to
tathe picture (p.124).
You cannot take a picture during autofocusing. Take the picture while the
Live View image is displayed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
137
MF: Focusing Manually
You can magnify the image and focus precisely manually.
Set the lens focus mode switch to
<MF>.
Turn the lens focusing ring to focus
1
roughly.
Move the magnifying frame.
2
Press the <S> key to move the
magnifying frame to the position
where you want to focus.
To return the magnifying frame to the
center, press the <0> or <L>
button.
Magnifying frame
Magnihe image.
ss he <u> button.
X area within the magnifying frame
3
will be magnified.
Each time you press the <u> button,
the view will change as follows:
5x
10x
Normal view
Focus manually.
4
5
While looking at the magnified image,
turn the lens focusing ring to focus.
After achieving focus, press the <u>
button to return to the normal view.
AE lock
Magnified area position
Magnification
Take the picture.
Check the focus and exposure, then
press the shutter button to take the
picture (p.124).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
138
Live View Shooting Cautions
White <s> and Red <E> Internal Temperature Warning Icons
If the camera’s internal temperature increases due to prolonged Live
View shooting or a high ambient temperature, a white <s> icon will
appear. If you continue shooting while this icon is displayed, the image
quality of still photos may deteriorate. You should stop the Live View
shooting and allow the camera to cool down before shooting again.
If the camera’s internal temperature further increases while the white
<s> icon is displayed, a red <E> icon will start blinking. This blinking
icon is a warning that the Live View shooting will soon be terminated
automatically. If this happens, you will not be able to shoot again until the
camera’s internal temperature decreases. Turn off the power and let the
camera rest for a while.
Shooting with the Live View function at a high temperature for a
prolonged period will cause the <s> and <E> icons to appear earlier.
When not shooting, turn off the camera.
Live View Image Cautions
Under low- or bright-light onthe Live View image might not
reflect the brightness of thred image.
If the light source wthin the image changes, the screen might flicker. If
this happens, stop the Lie View shooting and resume shooting under
the actual light source to be used.
If you point the camera in a different direction, it might throw off the Live
View image’s correct brightness momentarily. Wait until the brightness
level stabilizes before shooting.
If there is a very bright light source in the picture, such as the sun, the
bright area might appear black on the LCD monitor. However, the actual
captured image will correctly show the bright area.
In low light, if you set the [6 LCD brightness] to a bright setting,
chrominance noise may appear in the Live View image. However, the
chrominance noise will not be recorded in the captured image.
When you magnify the image, the image sharpness may look more
pronounced than it really is.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
139
Live View Shooting Cautions
Shooting Result Cautions
When you shoot continuously with the Live View function for a long
period, the camera’s internal temperature may increase and it can
degrade image quality. Terminate Live View shooting when not shooting
images.
Before taking a long exposure, stop Live View shooting temporarily and
wait several minutes before shooting. This is to prevent image
degradation.
Live View shooting in high temperatures and at high ISO speeds may
cause noise or irregular colors.
When you shoot at high ISO speeds, noise (banding, dots of light, etc.)
may become noticeable.
If you take the picture during magnified view, the exposure might not
come out as desired. Return to the normal view before taking the picture.
During the magnified view, the shutter speed nd aperture will be
displayed in orange. Even if you takpictue during magnified view,
the image will be captured in tormview.
If [2 Auto Lighting Optimiz09is not set to [Disable], the
image may look bright ven if a eased exposure compensation or
decreased flash exposue compensation has been set.
If you use a TS-E lens to shift the lens vertically or use an Extension
Tube, the standard exposure might not be obtained or an irregular
exposure may result.
Custom Function Cautions
During Live View shooting, certain Custom Function settings will not take
effect (p.251).
Lens and Flash Cautions
The focus preset feature on super telephoto lenses cannot be used.
FE lock is not possible when the built-in flash or an external Speedlite is
used. Modeling flash will not work with an external Speedlite.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
140
Shooting Movies
Set the Mde Dal to <k> to
shoot mos. The movie
recg format will be MOV.
Cards which can record movies
When shooting movies, use a large-capacity SD card rated SD
Speed Class 6 “ ” or higher.
If you use a slow-writing card when shooting movies, the movie
might not be recorded properly. And if you playback a movie on a
card having a slow reading speed, the movie might not playback
properly.
To check the card’s read/write speed, refer to the card
manufacturer’s Web site.
About Full HD 1080
Full HD 1080 indicates compatibility with High-
Definition featuring 1080 vertical pixels (scanning
lines).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
141
kShooting Movies
Connecting the camera to a TV set is recommended to playback the
movies shot (p.218, 221).
Autoexposure Shooting
Set the Mode Dial to <k>.
1
X The reflex mirror will make a sound,
then the image will appear on the
LCD monitor.
Focus the subject.
2
Before shooting a movie, autofocus
or manual focus (p.131-138).
When you press the shutter button
halfway, the camera will focus with
the current F mode.
Shoot movie.
3
s the <A> button to start
ting a movie. To stop movie
shooting, press <A> again.
X While the movie is being shot, the
“o” mark will be displayed on the
upper right of the screen.
Recording movie
Microphone
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
142
kShooting Movies
During movie shooting, do not point the lens toward the sun. The sun’s
heat can damage the camera’s internal components.
Cautions for movie shooting are on pages 163 and 164.
If necessary, also read the Live View shooting cautions on pages
139 and 140.
The ISO speed, shutter speed, and aperture are set automatically.
AE lock is possible by pressing the <A> button (p.107). To cancel AE
lock during movie shooting, press the <S> button.
By holding down the <O> button and turning the <6> dial, you can
set the exposure compensation.
Pressing the shutter button halfway displays the shutter speed, aperture,
and ISO speed (p.146) on the screen’s bottom. This is the exposure
setting for taking a still photo.
On the shooting information display (p.22), if you playback a movie shot
with autoexposure, the shutter speed anaperture will not be displayed.
The image information (Exif) will d the settings used at the start of
the movie shooting.
Using an EX-series Speedlite (Sold Separately) Equipped with
a LED Light
This camera is compatible with the function turning on the LED light
automatically in low-light conditions during autoexposure shooting. For
details, see the EX-series Speedlite’s instruction manual.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
143
kShooting Movies
Manual Exposure Shooting
You can manually set the shutter speed, aperture, and ISO speed for
movie shooting. Using manual exposure to shoot movies is for
advanced users.
Set the Mode Dial to <k>.
1
X The reflex mirror will make a sound,
then the image will appear on the
LCD monitor.
Select [Movie exposure].
2
Press the <M> button and under
the [n] tab, select [Movie
exposure], hen press <0>.
Select [Manual].
SeleManual], then press <0>.
3
Seshutter speed and
4 aperture.
<6>
To set the shutter speed, turn the
<O> + <6>
<6> dial. The settable shutter
speeds depend on the frame rate
<9>.
• 8 / 7
:
1/4000 sec. - 1/60 sec.
• 6 / 5 / 4 : 1/4000 sec. - 1/30 sec.
To set the aperture, hold down the
<O> button and turn the <6>
dial.
Set the ISO speed.
5
Press the <Z> button and press the
<U> key or turn the <6> dial to
select the ISO speed.
• [AUTO] setting
:
ISO 100 - 6400
• Manual ISO setting : ISO 100 - 6400
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
144
kShooting Movies
Focus and shoot the movie.
6
The procedure is the same as steps 2
and 3 for “Autoexposure Shooting”
(p.142).
AE lock and exposure compensation cannot be set.
Changing the shutter speed or aperture during movie shooting is not
recommended since the changes in the exposure will be recorded.
If you use a lens whose maximum aperture changes while you zoom,
you should not zoom while shooting a movie. Changes in the exposure
may be recorded.
If you shoot a movie under fluorescent lighting, the movie image might
flicker.
With ISO Auto, the standard movie exposure will usually be obtained
even if the light level changes.
When shooting a movie of a moving subject, a shutter speed of 1/30 sec.
to 1/125 sec. is recommended. The faster the shutter speed, the less
smooth the subject’s movement will look.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
145
kShooting Movies
About the Information Display
Each time you press the <C> button, the information display will
change.
Picture Style
Movie shooting remaining time/
Elapsed time
AF mode
• d : Live mode
• c : Face detection Live
mode
AF point (Quick mode)
Magnifying frame
• f: Quick mode
Recording
movie
Movie shooting
mode
White balance
Auto Lighting
Optimizer
Digital zoom
magnification
Image-recording
quality
Battery check
Movie recording size
Video snapshot
Exposure mode
L:
Autoexposure
K:
Manual exposure
AE lock
LED light
Highlight tone
priority
Frame rate
Shutter speed
Rec. level: Manual
Aperture
ISO speed
Possible shots
Video snapshot
shooting duration
Exposure compensation amount
* When an Eye-Fi card has been inserted in the camera, the Eye-Fi transmission
status (p.265) will be displayed.
If there is no card in the camera, the movie shooting remaining time will
be displayed in red.
When movie shooting starts, the movie shooting remaining time will
change to the elapsed time.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
146
kShooting Movies
Notes for Both Autoexposure and Manual Exposure Shooting
A movie file is recorded each time you shoot a movie.
The image’s field of view is approx. 99%.
The sound will be recorded by the camera’s built-in monaural
microphone (p.142).
Stereo sound recording is possible by connecting an external
microphone (commercially available) equipped with a stereo mini plug
(3.5mm dia.) to the camera’s external microphone IN terminal (p.18).
Movie-related settings are under the [n], [o], and [Z] menu
tabs (p.157).
With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E8, the total shooting time will be
as follows: At 23°C/73°F: Approx. 1 hr. 40 min., At 0°C/32°F: Approx. 1
hr. 20 min.
Final Image Simulation
The final image simulation reflects tffectof the Picture Style, white
balance, etc., in the movie imso ou can see what the captured
movie will look like.
During movie shooting, he movie image will automatically reflect the
settings listed below.
Final image simulation for movie shooting
Picture Style
* All parameters such as sharpness, contrast, color saturation, and color tone
will be reflected.
White balance
Exposure
Depth of field
Auto Lighting Optimizer
Peripheral illumination correction
Highlight tone priority
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
147
kShooting Movies
Shooting Still Photos
While shooting a movie, you can also
take a still photo by pressing the shutter
button completely.
Shooting Stills in the <k> Mode
If you take a still photo during movie shooting, the movie will record
a still moment lasting approx. 1 sec.
The captured still photo will be recorded to the card, and the movie
shooting will resume automatically when the Live View image is
displayed.
The movie and still photo will be recorded s separate files on the
card.
Functions particular to still shg ae shown below. Other
functions will be the same as ovie shooting.
Function
Settings
As set in [1 Quality].
When the movie-recording size is [1920x1080] or
[1280x720], the aspect ratio will be 16:9. When the
size is [640x480], the aspect ratio will be 4:3.
Image-recording quality
• Autoexposure shooting: Shutter speed and
aperture automatically set (displayed when
pressing the shutter button halfway).
• Manual exposure shooting: Shutter speed and
aperture manually set.
Exposure setting
AEB
Canceled
Drive mode
Flash
Single shooting (Self-timer not possible)
Flash off
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
148
Shooting Function Settings
Function settings particular to movie shooting are explained here.
QQuick Control
While the image is displayed on the LCD monitor, you can press the
<Q> button to set the AF mode, white balance, Picture Style, Auto
Lighting Optimizer, image-recording quality (for still photos), movie-
recording size, movie digital zoom, and video snapshots.
Press the <Q> button. (7)
1
X The functions settable with Quick
Control will appear on the left of the
screen.
If the AF mode is <f>, the AF
point will also be displayed.
Selea function and set it.
2
Prs the <V> key to select a
ncion.
he selected function and Feature
guide (p.48) will appear.
Press the <U> key or turn the
<6> dial to change the setting.
Pressing <0> will display the
respective function’s setting screen.
The image-recording quality setting will be reflected in all shooting modes.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
149
3 Setting the Movie-recording Size
Under the [o] tab, [Movie rec. size]
enables you to select the movie’s image
size [****x****] and frame rate [9]
(frames recorded per second). The 9
(frame rate) switches automatically
depending on the [6 Video system]
setting.
Image size
[1920x1080] : Full High-Definition (Full HD) recording quality.
[1280x720] : High-Definition (HD) recording quality.
[640x480]
: Standard-definition recording quality. The aspect
ratio will be 4:3.
Frame rate (fps: frames per second)
[8] [6]
[7] [5]
[4]
: For areas where thformat is NTSC (North
America, JapaKor, Mexico, etc.).
: For areas whTV format is PAL (Europe,
Russia, China, tralia, etc.).
: Mainly fomoion pictures.
When [1920x1080] is set as movie recording size, you can use the digital
zoom. For the setting procedure, see page 152.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
150
3 Setting the Movie-recording Size
Total Movie Recording Time and File Size Per Minute
Due to limitations of the file system, movie shooting will stop
automatically if the file size of a single movie clip reaches 4GB. To
resume movie shooting, press the <A> button. (A new movie file starts
being recorded.)
Total Recording Time (approx.)
Movie-recording
Size
File Size
(approx.)
4GB Card 8GB Card 16GB Card
6
[1920x1080]
5
4
8
7
6
5
11 min.
22 min.
22 min.
44 min.
44 min.
330 MB/min.
[1280x720]
[640x480]
11 min.
46 min.
330 MB/min.
82.5 MB/min.
1 hr. 32 min3 hr. 4 min.
An increase of the camera’s internal temperature may cause movie
shooting to stop before the maximum recording time shown in the table
above (p.163).
The maximum recording time of one movie clip is 29 min. 59 sec.
Depending on the subject and the increase in the camera’s internal
temperature, the movie shooting might stop sooner than 29 min. 59 sec.
With ZoomBrowser EX/ImageBrowser (provided software, p.302), you can
extract still photos from a movie. The still image quality will be as follows:
Approx. 2.1 megapixels at [1920x1080], approx. 920,000 pixels at
[1280x720], and approx. 310,000 pixels at [640x480].
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
151
3 Using Movie Digital Zoom
When the image size is set to [1920x1080] (Full HD), you can shoot
with an approx. 3x to 10x digital zoom.
Select [1920x1080 9].
Under the [o] tab, set [Movie rec.
1
size] to [1920x1080 9] by turning
the <6> dial.
Set the digital zoom.
Press the <U> key to select [
then press <0>.
2
],
Press the <M> button to exit the
menu and return to movie shooting.
Use digital zoom.
3
While holding down the <B>
buttopresthe <u> (zoom in) or
<I(zoom out) button.
ep 2, you can cancel digital zoom
electing [OFF].
Using a tripod is recommended to prevent camera shake.
The image cannot be magnified for focusing.
Even if the AF mode has been set to [Quick mode], it will switch
automatically to [Live mode] during movie shooting. Also, in [Live
mode], the AF point is displayed larger than with other recording sizes.
Since the image is processed digitally when using the digital zoom, the
higher the zoom magnification, the rougher it will look.
If you use digital zoom, noise and light spots may be more visible.
Focusing may be difficult if the AF point covers both a near and far
subject.
Still photo shooting is not possible.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
152
3 Taking Video Snapshots
You can easily create a short movie with the video snapshot function.
A video snapshot is a short movie clip lasting 2 sec., 4 sec., or 8 sec. A
collection of video snapshots is called a video snapshot album and can
be saved to the card as a single movie file. By changing the scene or
angle in each video snapshot, you can create dynamic short movies.
A video snapshot album can also be played together with background
music (p.156, 213).
Video Snapshot Album Concept
Video
Video
Video
snapshot 1
snapshot 2
snapshot x
Video snapshot albm
Setting the Video Snapshot Sooting Duration
In step 2 below, you can seleec. movie] for example, and each
video snapshot you shoot will be 2 sec. long.
Select [Video snapshot].
1
Under the [o] tab, select [Video
snapshot].
Select the [Video snapshot]
2 shooting duration.
Press the <V> key to select the
video snapshot shooting duration,
then press <0>.
Press the <M> button to exit the
menu and return to movie shooting,
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
153
3 Taking Video Snapshots
Creating a Video Snapshot Album
Shoot the first video snapshot.
3
Press the <A> button to shoot.
X The blue bars indicating the shooting
duration will gradually decrease. After
the set shooting duration elapses, the
shooting stops automatically.
X After the LCD monitor turns off and
the access lamp stops blinking, the
confirmation screen will appear.
Shooting duration
Save as a video snapshot album.
4
Press the <U> key to select [
Save as album], then press <0>.
X The vie cp will be saved as the
video apshot album’s first video
shot.
Continue to shoot more video
5 snapshots.
Repeat step 3 to shoot the next video
snapshot.
Press the <U> key to select [
Add to album], then press <0>.
To create another video snapshot
album, select [WSave as a new
album].
Quit the video snapshot shooting.
6
Set [Video snapshot] to [Disable].
To return to normal movie
shooting, be sure to set [Disable].
Press the <M> button to exit the
menu and return to normal movie
shooting,
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
154
3 Taking Video Snapshots
Options in Steps 4 and 5
Option
Description
The movie clip will be saved as the video
snapshot album’s first video snapshot.
Save as album (Step 4)
Add to album (Step 5)
The video snapshot just recorded will be added
to the album recorded immediately before.
A new video snapshot album is created and
the movie clip is saved as the first video
snapshot. The new album will be a different
file from the previously recorded album.
WSave as a new album (Step 5)
1Playback video snapshot
(Steps 4 and 5)
The video snapshot just recorded will be played.
For playback operations, see the table below.
Do not save to album (Step 4) If you want to delete the video snapshot you
Delete without saving to
just recorded and not save it to the album,
album (Step 5)
select [OK].
[Playback video snapshot] Operatins
Operation
back Description
2Exit
Returns to evius screen.
By ressing >, you can play or pause the just-
recoded vdeo snapshot.
7Play
5First frame
Skip backward*
Displays the first scene of the album’s first video snapshot.
Each time you press <0>, the video snapshot skips back
by a few seconds.
Each time you press <0>, a single previous frame is
displayed. If you hold down <0>, it will rewind the movie.
3Previous frame
6Next frame
Each time you press <0>, the movie will play frame-by-
frame. If you hold down <0>, it will fast forward the movie.
Each time you press <0>, the video snapshot skips
forward by a few seconds.
Skip forward*
4Last frame
Displays the last scene of the album’s last video snapshot.
Playback position
mm’ ss”
Playback time (minutes:seconds)
You can adjust the built-in speaker’s (p.210) sound volume
by turning the <6> dial.
9Volume
* With [Skip backward/Skip forward], the skipping duration will correspond to the
number of seconds set under [Video snapshot] (approx. 2 sec., 4 sec., or 8 sec.).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
155
3 Taking Video Snapshots
You can add to an album only video snapshots having the same duration (approx.
2 sec., 4 sec., or 8 sec. each). If you stop shooting a video snapshot before the set
shooting duration elapses, the video snapshot will be added to the preceding
album. And a new album will be created for subsequent video snapshots.
Note that if you do any of the following while shooting video snapshots, a
new album will be created for subsequent video snapshots.
• Changing the [Movie rec. size] (p.150).
• Changing the [Video snapshot] shooting duration (p.153).
• Changing the [Sound rec.] setting from [Auto/Manual] to [Disable] or
from [Disable] to [Auto/Manual] (p.160).
• Opening/closing the card slot cover or battery compartment cover.
• Interrupting the use of AC Adapter Kit ACK-E8 (sold separately).
• Updating the firmware.
You cannot change the order of the video snapshots in an album or add
more video snapshots to the album later.
You cannot take still photos while shooting a ideo snapshot.
The shooting duration of a video snapshot is onaproximate. Depending on the
frame rate, the shooting duration displayring ayback might not be exact.
Playing an Album
You can playback a complted album in the same way as a normal
movie. For details, see pages 212 and 217.
Press the <x> button.
Press the <U> key to select an
album, then press <0>.
Movies shot as a video snapshot will have an
<
> icon on the screen’s upper left.
Music recorded on the memory card must be used only for private
enjoyment. Do not violate the rights of the copyright holder.
To play background music, you must first copy the background music
from the EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk (provided) to the card. For the
copying procedure, see the Software Instruction Manual in the CD-ROM.
Provided Software Usable with Albums
• EOS Utility: By copying background music to the card, you can play
background music together with the playback of albums, normal movies,
and slide shows on the camera.
• ZoomBrowser EX/ImageBrowser: The edition of albums is possible.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
156
3 Menu Function Settings
The menu options displayed under the [n], [o], and [Z] tabs
are explained below.
[n] tab
Movie exposure
Normally, set this to [Auto].
Setting it to [Manual] enables you to manually set the ISO speed,
shutter speed, and aperture for movie shooting (p.144).
AF mode
The AF modes will be the same descibed on pages 131-137.
You can select [Live mode]ue mode], or [Quick mode]. Note
that continuous focusing oovig subject is not possible.
AF with shutter buton durig k(movie recording)
When [Enable] is set, AF is possible during movie shooting.
However, continuous autofocusing is not possible. If you autofocus
during movie shooting, you might momentarily throw the focus way
off or change the exposure. The movie will also record the lens
operation noise.
If the AF mode is set to [Quick mode], AF will be executed in [Live
mode].
The settings under the [n/o/Z] menu tabs will take effect
only in the <k> mode. They will not be applied in shooting modes
other than the <k> mode.
The AF mode setting will also be applied to Live View shooting.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
157
3 Menu Function Settings
kShutter/AE lock button
You can change the function assigned to the shutter button’s halfway
position and to the AE lock button.
• AF/AE lock:
Normal function. Press the shutter button halfway to execute AF.
Press the <w> button for AE lock.
• AE lock/AF:
Press the shutter button halfway for AE lock. For AF, press the
<w> button. Convenient when you want to focus and meter at
different parts of the picture.
• AF/AF lock, no AE lock:
Press the shutter button halfway to execute AF. While holding
down the <w> button, press the shutter button to take a still photo
without executing AF. Convenient when you do not want to
autofocus when taking a still photo durinmovie shooting. AE lock
is not possible.
• AE/AF, no AE lock:
Press the shutter button halor metering. For AF, press the
<w> button. AE lock s not possible.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
158
3 Menu Function Settings
Remote control
You can use the Remote Controller RC-6 (sold separately, p.261) to
start and stop the movie shooting. Set the release mode switch to
<2>, then press the transmit button. If the switch is set to <o>
(immediate shooting), still photo shooting will take effect.
kHighlight tone priority
If [Enable] is set, highlight detail will be improved. The dynamic
range is expanded from the standard 18% gray to bright highlights.
The gradation between the grays and highlights becomes smoother.
The settable ISO speed range will be ISO 200-6400. The Auto
Lighting Optimizer will also be set automatically to [Disable] and
cannot be changed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
159
3 Menu Function Settings
[o] tab
Sound recording
Normally, the built-in microphone will
record monaural sound. Stereo sound
recording is possible by connecting an
external microphone equipped with a
stereo mini plug (3.5mm dia.) to the
camera’s exteral microphone IN
termina18). When an external
microphis connected, sound
reg will switch automatically to the
extmicrophone.
Level meter
[Sound rec.] options
[Auto]
: The sound recording level will be adjusted
automatically. Auto level control will operate
automatically in response to the sound level.
[Manual] : For advanced users. You can adjust the sound
recording level to one of 64 levels. Select [Rec. level]
and look at the level meter while pressing the <U>
key to adjust the sound recording level. While looking
at the peak hold indicator (approx. 3 sec.), adjust so
that the level meter sometimes lights up the “12” (-12
dB) mark on the right for the loudest sounds. If it
exceeds “0,” the sound will be distorted.
[Disable] : Sound will not be recorded.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
160
3 Menu Function Settings
[Wind filter]
When [Enable] is set, outdoor wind noise entering the microphone
will be reduced. Note that some low-tone noise might also be
reduced. When shooting in places where there is no wind, set this to
[Disable] for a more natural sound recording.
The sound volume balance between L (left) and R (right) cannot be
adjusted.
The 48 kHz sampling frequency will be 16-bit recordings for both L and
R.
Metering timer
You can change how long the exposure setting is displayed (AE lock
time).
Grid display
With [Grid 1l] or [Grid 2m]can display grid lines. It can
help you level the camera ticaor horizontally.
Video snapshot
For video snapshotsyou can set the shooting duration for a single
video snapshot to approx. 2 sec., 4 sec., or 8 sec. For details, see
page 153.
The Metering timer and Grid display settings will also be reflected in Live
View shooting.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
161
3 Menu Function Settings
[Z] tab
Exposure compensation
Although exposure compensation can be set up to ±5 stops,
exposure compensation for movies is restricted only up to ±3 stops.
For still photos, exposure compensation may extend up to ±5 stops.
Auto Lighting Optimizer
The Auto Lighting Optimizer can be set as explained on page 109. It
will be applied to both movie shooting and still photos taken during
movie shooting.
Under the [n] tab, if [kHighlighone priority] is set to
[Enable], the Auto Lighting Optimizill be set automatically to
[Disable] and cannot be cha
Custom White Balance
As explained on page 117, te image for custom white balance can
be selected.
Picture Style
The Picture Style can be set as explained on page 81. It will be
applied to both movie shooting and still photos taken during movie
shooting.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
162
White <s> and Red <E> Internal Temperature Warning Icons
If the camera’s internal temperature increases due to prolonged movie
shooting or a high ambient temperature, a white <s> icon will appear.
Even if you shoot a movie while this icon is displayed, the movie’s image
quality will not be affected. However, if you shoot still photos, the image
quality of the still photos may deteriorate. You should stop shooting still
photos and allow the camera to cool down.
If the camera’s internal temperature further increases while the white
<s> icon is displayed, a red <E> icon may start blinking. This blinking
icon is a warning that movie shooting will soon be terminated
automatically. If this happens, you will not be able to shoot again until the
camera’s internal temperature decreases. Turn off the power and let the
camera rest for a while.
Movie shooting at a high temperature for a prolonged period will cause
the <s> and <E> icons to appear sooner. When not shooting, turn off
the camera.
Movie Shooting Caution
Recording and Image uality
If the attached lens as aImage Stabilizer, the Image Stabilizer will
operate at all times even if you do not press the shutter button halfway.
The Image Stabilizer will thereby consume battery power and may
shorten the total movie shooting time or decrease the number of possible
shots. If you use a tripod or if the Image Stabilizer is not necessary, you
should set the IS switch to <2>.
The camera’s built-in microphone will also record camera operation
noise. Using a commercially-available external microphone can prevent
(or reduce) these noises from being recorded.
Do not connect anything other than an external microphone to the
camera’s external microphone IN terminal.
If movie shooting is not possible due to insufficient remaining capacity of
the card, the movie recording size and movie shooting remaining time
(p.146) will be displayed in red.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
163
Movie Shooting Cautions
Recording and Image Quality
If you use a card having a slow writing speed, a five-level
indicator might appear on the right of the screen during
movie shooting. It indicates how much data has not yet been
written to the card (remaining capacity of the internal buffer
memory). The slower the card, the faster the indicator will
climb upward. If the indicator becomes full, movie shooting
will stop automatically.
Indicator
If the card has a fast writing speed, the indicator will either
not appear or the level (if displayed) will hardly go upward.
First, shoot a few test movies to see if the card can write fast enough.
If you take still photos during movie shooting, the movie shooting might
stop. Setting a low image-recording quality for still images might resolve
this problem.
Playback and TV connection
If the brightness changes during autosure movie shooting, that part
might look momentarily still wu payback the movie. In such cases,
shoot movies with manual exp
If you connect the camra to a TV set with an HDMI cable (p.218) and
shoot a movie in [1920x080or [1280x720], the movie being shot will
be displayed at a small size on the TV. However, the actual movie will be
properly recorded at the movie recording size that was set.
If you connect the camera to a TV set (p.218, 221) and shoot a movie,
the TV will not output any sound during the shooting. However, the
sound will be properly recorded.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
164
Handy Features
Silencing the Beeper (p.166)
Card Reminder (p.166)
Setting the Image Review (p.166)
Setting the Auto Poer-off Time (p.167)
Adjusting the LCD Monitor Brightness (p.167)
Creating and Selecting a Folder (p.168)
File Numbering Methods (p.170)
Setting Copyright Information (p.172)
Auto Rotation of Vertical Images (p.174)
Checking Camera Settings (p.175)
Reverting the Camera to the Default Settings (p.176)
Turning the LCD Monitor Off/On (p.179)
Changing the Shooting Settings Screen Color (p.179)
Setting the Flash (p.180)
Automatic Sensor Cleaning (p.184)
Appending Dust Delete Data (p.185)
Manual Sensor Cleaning (p.187)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
165
Handy Features
3 Silencing the Beeper
You can prevent the beeper from sounding when focus is achieved or
during self-timer operation.
Under the [1] tab, select [Beep], then
press <0>. Select [Disable], then
press <0>.
3 Card Reminder
This prevents shooting if there is no card in the camera.
Under the [1] tab, select [Release
shutter without card], then press
<0>. Select [isable], then press
<0>.
If there icard installed and you press
thttebutton, “Card” will be
disd in the viewfinder, and you
cnnot release the shutter.
3 Setting the Image Review Time
You can set how long the image is displayed on the LCD monitor
immediately after capture. If [Off] is set, the image will not be displayed
immediately after image capture. If [Hold] is set, the image review will
be displayed up until the [Auto power off] time.
During image review, if you operate any camera controls such as
pressing the shutter button halfway, the image review will end.
Under the [1] tab, select [Image
review], then press <0>. Select the
desired setting, then press <0>.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
166
Handy Features
3 Setting the Auto Power-off Time
To save battery power, the camera turns off automatically after the set
time of idle operation elapses. You can set this auto power-off time.
When the camera has turned off due to auto power off, you can wake it
up by pressing the shutter button halfway or pressing any of the
following buttons: <M>, <B>, <x>, <A> etc.
If [Off] has been set, either turn off the camera yourself or press
the <B> button to turn off the LCD monitor to save battery
power.
Even if [Off] has been set and the camera is not used for 30 min.,
the LCD monitor will turn off automatically. To turn on the LCD
monitor again, press the <B> button.
Under the [5] tab, select [Auto power
off], then prss <0>. Select the desired
settihen press <0>.
3 Adjusting the LCD Monitor Brightness
You can adjust the brightness of the LCD monitor to make it easier to read.
Under the [6] tab, select [LCD
brightness], then press <0>. With the
adjustment screen displayed, press the
<U> key to adjust the brightness, then
press <0>.
When checking the exposure of an
image, set the LCD monitor brightness to
4 and prevent the ambient light from
affecting the reviewed image.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
167
Handy Features
3 Creating and Selecting a Folder
You can freely create and select the folder where the captured images
are to be saved.
This is optional since a folder will be created automatically for saving
captured images.
Create a Folder
Select [Select folder].
1
Under the [5] tab, select [Select
folder], then press <0>.
Select [Creae folder].
2
Selereatfolder], then press
>
Create a new folder.
3
Select [OK], then press <0>.
X A new folder with a higher one-up
folder number is created.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
168
Handy Features
Selecting a Folder
With the folder selection screen
Lowest file number
displayed, select a folder and press
<0>.
Number of images
in folder
X The folder where the captured
images will be saved is selected.
Subsequent captured images will be
recorded into the selected folder.
Folder name
Highest file number
About Folders
As with “100CANON” for example, the folder name starts with three digits
(folder number) followed by five alphanumeric characters. A folder can contain
up to 9999 images (file No. 0001 - 9999). When a folder becomes full, a new
folder with a higher one-up folder number is created automatically. Also, if
manual reset (p.171) is executed, a new folder will be created automatically.
Folders numbered from 100 to 999 can be created.
Creating Folders with a Personal Computer
With the card open on the screen, create a new folder named “DCIM”. Open
the DCIM folder and create as many folders as necessary to save and
organize your images. The folder name must follow the “100ABC_D” format
where the first three digits is 100 - 999 followed by five alphanumeric
characters. The five characters can be a combination of upper- or lower-case
letters from A to Z, numerals, and an underscore “_”. There can be no space in
the folder name. Also, folder names cannot have the same three-digit number
such as “100ABC_D” and “100W_XYZ” even if the letters are different.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
169
Handy Features
3 File Numbering Methods
The image files will be numbered from 0001 to 9999 in the order the
images are taken, then saved in a folder. You can change how the file
number is assigned.
The file number will appear on your computer in this format:
IMG_0001.JPG.
Under the [5] tab, select [File
numbering], then press <0>. The
available settings are described below.
Select one, then press <0>.
[Continuous]: The file numbering contiues in sequence even
after you replace the card or creaa foler.
Even after you replace the card or cte a new folder, the file
numbering continues in sequup o 9999. This is convenient
when you want to save magembered anywhere between 0001
to 9999 in multiple cardor flders into one folder in your personal
computer.
If the replacement card or existing folder already contains images
recorded previously, the file numbering of the new images might
continue from the file numbering of the existing images in the card or
folder. If you want to use continuous file numbering, you should use
a newly-formatted card each time.
File numbering after
replacing the card
File numbering after
creating a folder
Card-1
Card-1
Card-2
100
XXX-0051
101
XXX-0052
XXX-0051
XXX-0052
Next sequential file number
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
170
Handy Features
[Auto reset]: The file numbering is reset to 0001 whenever you
replace the card or create a folder.
Whenever the card is replaced or a new folder created, the file
numbering starts from 0001. This is convenient if you want to
organize images according to cards or folders.
If the replacement card or existing folder already contains images
recorded previously, the file numbering of the new images might
continue from the file numbering of the existing images in the card or
folder. If you want to save images with the file numbering starting
from 0001, use a newly formatted card each time.
File numbering after
replacing the card
File numbering after
creating a folder
Card-1
Card-1
Card-2
100
XXX-0051
101
XXX-0001
XXX-0051
100-0001
File numbering it
[Manual reset]: To eset thile numbering to 0001 manually or
to start from file numbe0001 in a new folder.
When you reset the file numbering manually, a new folder is created
automatically and the file numbering of images saved to that folder
starts from 0001.
This is convenient if you want to use different folders for the images
taken yesterday and the ones taken today, for example.
After the manual reset, the file numbering returns to continuous or
auto reset. (There will be no Manual reset confirmation screen.)
If the file number in folder No. 999 reaches 9999, shooting will not be
possible even if the card still has storage capacity. The LCD monitor will
display a message telling you to replace the card. Replace it with a new
card.
For both JPEG and RAW images, the file name will start with “IMG_”. Movie
file names will start with “MVI_”. The extension will be “.JPG” for JPEG
images, “.CR2” for RAW images, and “. MOV” for movies.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
171
Handy Features
3 Setting Copyright InformationN
When you set the copyright information, it will be appended to the
image as Exif information.
Select [Copyright information].
1
Under the [7] tab, select [Copyright
information], then press <0>.
Select the option to be set.
2
Select [Enter author’s name] or
[Enter copyright details], then press
<0>.
X The entrscreen will appear.
lecDisplay copyright info.] to
k the copyright information
cently set.
Select [Delete copyright
information] to delete the copyright
information currently set.
Enter text.
Refer to “Text Entry Procedure” on
3
the next page and enter the copyright
information.
Enter up to 63 alphanumeric
characters and symbols.
Exit the setting.
4
After entering the text, press the
<M> button to exit.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
172
Handy Features
Text Entry Procedure
Changing the entry area:
Press the <Q> button to toggle
between the top and bottom entry
areas.
Moving the cursor:
Press the <U> key to move the
cursor.
Entering text:
In the bottom area, press the <S> key or turn the <6> dial to
select a character, then press <0> to enter it.
Deleting a character:
Press the <L> button to delete oe chacter.
Exiting:
After entering the text, pre<M> button to finalize the text
entry and return to te screen in step 2.
Canceling the text entry:
To cancel the text entry, press the <C> button and the screen in
step 2 will reappear.
You can also set or check the copyright information with EOS Utility
(provided software, p.302).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
173
Handy Features
3 Auto Rotation of Vertical Images
Vertical images are rotated automatically so they
are displayed vertically on the camera’s LCD
monitor and on the personal computer instead of
horizontally. The setting of this feature can be
changed.
Under the [5] tab, select [Auto rotate],
then press <0>. The available settings
are described below. Select one, then
press <0>.
[OnPD] : The vertical image is automatically rotated during playback
on both the camera’s LCD monitor and on the computer.
[OnD]
: The vertical image is automatcally rotated only on the
computer.
[Off]
: The vertical imanoautomatically rotated.
FAQ
The vertical image is not rotated during the image review
immediately after it is captured.
Press the <x> button and the image playback will display the
rotated image.
[OnPD] is set, but the image does not rotate during playback.
Auto rotate will not work with vertical images captured while [Auto
rotate] was set to [Off]. If the vertical image is taken while the camera
is pointed up or down, the image might not be rotated automatically for
playback. In such a case, see “Rotating the Image” on page 205.
On the camera’s LCD monitor, I want to rotate an image
captured when [OnD] had been set.
Set [OnPD], then playback the image. It will be rotated.
The vertical image does not rotate on the computer screen.
The software used is not compatible with image rotation. Use the
software provided with the camera instead.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
174
Handy Features
C Checking Camera Settings
While the shooting settings (p.47) are displayed, press the <C>
button to display the camera’s major function settings.
Settings display
Card remaining capacity
Color space (p.121)
WB correction (p.119)/
WB bracketing (p.120)
Lve View shooting (p.123)
Red-eye reduction (p.91)
Auto rotate display (p.174)
Date/Time (p.34)
Beeper (p.166)
Auto power off (p.167)
Sensor cleaning (p.184)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
175
Handy Features
3 Reverting the Camera to the Default SettingsN
The camera’s shooting settings and menu settings can be reverted to
the default. This option is available in Creative Zone modes.
Select [Clear settings].
1
Under the [7] tab, select [Clear
settings], then press <0>.
Select [Clear all camera settings].
2
Select [Clear all camera settings],
then press <0>.
S[OK].
Sect [OK], then press <0>.
X Setting [Clear all camera settings]
will reset the camera to the default
settings on the next page.
3
FAQ
Clearing all camera settings:
After the procedure above, select [Clear all Custom Func. (C.Fn)]
in [7 Clear settings] to clear all the Custom Function settings
(p.250).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
176
Handy Features
Shooting Settings
AF mode One-Shot AF
AF point selection Automatic selection
Image-recording Settings
Quality
73
Picture Style
Auto
Drive mode
u
(Single shooting)
Auto Lighting
Optimizer
Standard
q (Evaluative
metering)
Metering mode
Peripheral
illumination
correction
Enable/
Correction data
retained
ISO speed
ISO Auto
AUTO (Auto)
Max.: 3200
Color space
White balance
sRGB
Q (Auto)
Exposure
compensation/AEB
Canceled
NormalFiring
0 (Zero)
Built-in flash func.
setting
Custom white
balance
Canceled
WB correction
WB-BKT
File numbering
Atcleaning
Dust elete Data
Canceled
Canceled
Continuous
Enable
Flash exposure
compensation
Custom Functions Unchanged
Erased
Camera Settings
Auto power off
30 ec.
Beep
Enable
Release shutter
without card
Enable
Image review
Histogram
2 sec.
Brightness
e (10 images)
OnzD
Image jump w/6
Auto rotate
LCD brightness
LCD off/on button Shutter button
Date/Time
Language
Video system
Feature guide
Unchanged
Unchanged
Unchanged
Enable
Copyright information Unchanged
Bass boost Disable
Control over HDMI Disable
Eye-Fi transmission Disable
My Menu settings Unchanged
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
177
Handy Features
Live View Shooting Settings
Movie Shooting Settings
Live View shooting Enable
Movie exposure
Auto
AF mode
Live mode
Off
3:2
AF mode
Live mode
Grid display
Aspect ratio
Metering timer
AF w/ shutter
button during k
Disable
16 sec.
kShutter/AE lock
button
Remote control
AF/AE lock
Disable
kHighlight tone
priority
Disable
Movie recording size 1920x1080
Sound recording Auto
Metering timer
Grid display
16 sec.
Off
Video snapshot
Disable
Expoue
penation
Canceled
Standard
o Lighting
Otimizer
Custom white
balance
Canceled
Auto
Picture Style
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
178
Handy Features
3 Turning the LCD Monitor Off/On
The shooting settings display (p.47) can be turned on or off by pressing
the shutter button halfway.
Under the [6] tab, select [LCD off/on
btn], then press <0>. The available
settings are described below. Select one,
then press <0>.
[Shutter btn.] : When you press the shutter button halfway, the
display will turn off. And when you let go of the
shutter button, the display will turn on.
[Shutter/DISP]: When you press the shutter button halfway, the
display will turn off. And when you let go of the
shutter button, the dispay will remain off. To turn on
the display, press he <B> button.
[Remains on] : Display remains even when you press the shutter
button haTo urn off display, press the <B>
buttn.
3 Changing the Shooting Settings Screen Color
You can change the background color of the shooting settings screen.
Under the [5] tab, select [Screen
color], then press <0>. Select the
desired color, then press <0>.
When you exit the menu, the selected
color will be displayed for the shooting
settings screen.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
179
3 Setting the FlashN
The built-in flash and external Speedlite settings can be set with the
camera’s menu. You can use the camera’s menu to set the external
Speedlite function settings only if the attached EX-series Speedlite is
compatible with this function.
The setting procedure is the same as setting a camera menu function.
Select [Flash control].
Under the [1] tab, select [Flash
control], then press <0>.
X The flash control screen will appear.
[Flash firing]
Normally, sthis to [Enable].
If [Dle] is set, neither the built-
asnor the external Speedlite
ire. This is useful when you only
want to use the flash’s AF-assist
beam.
E-TTL II Metering Modes
For normal flash exposures, set this
to [Evaluative].
[Average] is for advanced users. As
with an external Speedlite, the
metering area is averaged. Flash
exposure compensation may be
necessary.
Even if [Flash firing] has been set to [Disable], if focus is difficult to achieve
in low light, the built-in flash may still fire a series of flashes (AF-assist
beam, p.86).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
180
3 Setting the FlashN
[Built-in flash func. setting] and [External flash func. setting]
With [Built-in flash func. setting] and [External flash func. setting],
you can set the functions listed in the table below. The functions
displayed under [External flash func. setting] will vary depending on
the Speedlite model.
Select [Built-in flash func. setting]
or [External flash func. setting].
X The flash functions will be displayed.
The functions not dimmed can be
selected and set.
[Built-in flash func. setting] and [External flash func.
setting] Settable Functions
[Built-in flash . settng]
[External
sy
Custom
Function
flash func.
setting]
Page
Normal
Fring
ess Wireless
(.191)
(p.194)
Flash mode
k
k
k
k
k
k
182
182
Shutter sync.
FEB*
k
Wireless flash
Channel
k
k
k
189
191
195
k
k
Flash group
Flash exposure
compensation
k
k
k
k
104
Zoom*
* For [FEB] (Flash exposure bracketing) and [Zoom], refer to the Speedlite’s
instruction manual.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
181
3 Setting the FlashN
Shutter sync.
Normally, set this to [1st curtain] so that the flash fires immediately
after the exposure starts.
If [2nd curtain] is set, the flash will fire right before the exposure
ends. When this is combined with a slow sync speed, you can create
a trail of light such as from car headlights at night. With 2nd-curtain
sync, a preflash is fired when you press the shutter button
completely. This is to determine the exposure. Then immediately
before the exposure ends, the real flash is fired. Therefore, two
flashes will be fired. However, with shutter speeds faster than 1/30
sec., 1st curtain sync will automatically take effect.
If an external Speedlite is attached, you can also set [Hi-speed]
(e). For details, see the Speedlite’s instruction manual.
Wireless flash
See “Wireless Flash Photography” on pag189.
Flash exposure compensation
See “y Flash Exposure Cosaon” on page 104.
Flash mode
You can select the flash mode to suit your desired flash shooting.
[E-TTL II] is the standard mode of
EX-series Speedlites for automatic
flash shooting.
[Manual flash] is for advanced users
who want to set the [Flash output]
(1/1 to 1/128) themselves.
Regarding other flash modes, refer to
your Speedlite’s instruction manual.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
182
3 Setting the FlashN
Clear flash settings
With the [Built-in flash func. setting] or [External flash func.
setting] screen displayed, press the <C> button to display the
screen to clear the flash settings. When you select [OK], the
settings for the flash will be cleared.
Setting the External Speedlite Custom Functions
The Custom Functions displayed under [External flash C.Fn setting]
will vary depending on the Speedlite model.
Display the Custom Function.
1
With the camera ready to shoot with
an external Speedlite, select
[External flash C.Fn setting], then
press <0>.
t te Custom Function.
2
ress the <U> key to select the
function number, then set the
function. The procedure is the same
as setting the camera’s Custom
Functions (p.250).
To clear all the Custom Function
settings, select [Clear ext. flash C.Fn
set.] in step 1.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
183
f Automatic Sensor Cleaning
Whenever you set the power switch to <1> or <2>, the Self
Cleaning Sensor Unit operates to automatically shake off the dust on
the front of the sensor. Normally, you need not pay attention to this
operation. However, you can execute the sensor cleaning at anytime as
well as disable it.
Cleaning the Sensor Now
Select [Sensor cleaning].
1
Under the [6] tab, select [Sensor
cleaning], then press <0>.
Select [Cleanowf].
2
Selelean nowf], then press
0>
ct [OK] on the dialog screen,
tn press <0>.
X The screen will indicate that the
sensor is being cleaned. Although
there will be a shutter sound, a
picture is not taken.
For best results, do the sensor cleaning while the camera bottom is
placed on a table or other flat surface.
Even if you repeat the sensor cleaning, the result will not improve that
much. Right after the sensor cleaning is finished, the [Clean nowf]
option will remain disabled temporarily.
Disabling Automatic Sensor Cleaning
In step 2, select [Auto cleaningf] and set it to [Disable].
X The sensor cleaning will no longer be executed when you set the
power switch to <1> or <2>.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
184
3 Appending Dust Delete DataN
Normally, the Self Cleaning Sensor Unit will eliminate most of the dust
that might be visible on captured images. However, in case visible dust
still remains, you can append the Dust Delete Data to the image for
erasing the dust spots later. The Dust Delete Data is used by Digital
Photo Professional (provided software, p.302) to erase the dust spots
automatically.
Preparation
Get a solid-white object (paper, etc.).
Set the lens focal length to 50mm or longer.
Set the lens focus mode switch to <MF> and set the focus to infinity
(∞). If the lens has no distance scale, look at the front of the lens and
turn the focusing ring clockwise all the way.
Obtain the Dust Delete Data
lec[Dust Delete Data].
1
nder the [y] tab, select [Dust
Delete Data], then press <0>.
Select [OK].
Select [OK] and press <0>. After
2
the automatic self-cleaning of the
sensor is performed, a message will
appear. Although there will be a
shutter sound, a picture is not taken.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
185
3 Appending Dust Delete DataN
Photograph a solid-white object.
3
At a distance of 20 cm - 30 cm (0.7 ft.
- 1.0 ft.), fill the viewfinder with a
patternless, solid-white object and
take a picture.
X The picture will be taken in aperture-
priority AE mode at an aperture of
f/22.
Since the image will not be saved, the
data can still be obtained even if there
is no card in the camera.
X
When the picture is taken, the camera
will start collecting the Dust Delete
Data. When he Dust Delete Data is
obtained, a essage will appear. Select
[
OKthe menu will reappear.
e dta was not obtained
essfully, a message to that effect
will appear. Follow the “Preparation”
procedure on the preceding page, then
select [OK]. Take the picture again.
About the Dust Delete Data
After the Dust Delete Data is obtained, it is appended to all the JPEG
and RAW images captured thereafter. Before an important shoot, you
should update the Dust Delete Data by obtaining it again.
For details about using Digital Photo Professional (provided software,
p.302) to erase dust spots, see the Software Instruction Manual (p.304)
in the Software Instruction Manual CD-ROM.
The Dust Delete Data appended to the image is so small that it hardly
affects the image file size.
Be sure to use a solid-white object such as a new sheet of white paper. If the
paper has any pattern or design, it may be recognized as dust data and
affect the accuracy of the dust deletion with the software.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
186
3 Manual Sensor CleaningN
Dust which could not be removed by the automatic sensor cleaning can
be removed manually with a blower, etc.
The surface of the image sensor is extremely delicate. If the
sensor needs to be cleaned directly, having it done by a Canon
Service Center is recommended.
Before cleaning the sensor, detach the lens from the camera.
Select [Sensor cleaning].
1
Under the [6] tab, select [Sensor
cleaning], then press <0>.
Select [Clean manually].
2
Select [Cean manually], then press
<.
ec[OK].
elect [OK], then press <0>.
X In a moment, the reflex mirror will
3
lockup and the shutter will open.
Clean the sensor.
4
End the cleaning.
5
Set the power switch to <2>.
For the power source, using AC Adapter Kit ACK-E8 (sold separately) is
recommended.
If you use a battery, make sure it is fully recharged. If the battery grip with
size-AA/LR6 batteries is attached, manual sensor cleaning will not be
possible.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
187
3 Manual Sensor CleaningN
While cleaning the sensor, never do any of the following. If the
power is cut off, the shutter will close and the shutter curtains and
image sensor might get damaged.
• Setting the power switch to <2>.
• Opening the battery compartment cover.
• Opening the card slot cover.
The surface of the image sensor is extremely delicate. Clean the sensor
with care.
Use a plain blower without any brush attached. A brush can scratch the
sensor.
Do not insert the blower tip inside the camera beyond the lens mount. If
the power is turned off, the shutter will close and the shutter curtains or
reflex mirror might get damaged.
Never use canned air or gas to clean the sensor. The blowing force can
damage the sensor or the spray gas can freeze on the sensor.
If the battery level becomes low while you clen the sensor, the beeper
will sound as a warning. Stop cleanine sesor.
If a smudge that cannot be removed a blower remains, having the
sensor cleaned by a Canon SCnter is recommended.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
188
Wireless Flash
Photography
You cause he built-in flash
for wiress flash shooting.
The camera’s built-in flash can work as a master unit
with Canon Speedlites having a wireless slave feature
and wirelessly trigger the Speedlite(s) to fire.
Canceling the slave unit’s auto power off
To cancel the slave unit’s auto power off, press the
camera’s <A> button. If you are using manual flash
firing, press the slave unit’s test firing (PILOT) button to
cancel the auto power off.
Be sure to also read the explanations about wireless flash
photography in the Speedlite’s instruction manual.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
189
Using Wireless FlashN
Slave Unit Settings and Position
Regarding your Speedlite (slave unit), refer to its instruction manual and
set it as follows. The settings other than the below for the slave unit’s
control are all set with the camera. Different types of Canon Speedlite
slave units can be used and controlled together.
(1) Set the Speedlite as a slave unit.
(2) Set the Speedlite’s transmission channel to the same one as
*1
the camera’s.
(3) If you want to set the flash ratio (p.196), set the slave unit ID.
(4) Position the camera and slave unit(s) within the range shown
below.
*2
(5) Face the slave unit’s wireless sensor toward the camera.
Wireless flash set-up example
Indoors
Approx.
10m
(32.8ft.)
Outdoors
Approx.
7m
(23.0ft.)
Approx.
80o
Approx. 5m Approx. 7m
(16.4ft.) (23.0ft.)
*1: If the Speedlite does not have a transmission channel setting function, the
camera can work with any channel.
*2: In small rooms, the slave unit may work even if its wireless sensor does not face
the camera. The camera’s wireless signals can bounce off the walls and be
received by the slave unit. With EX-series Speedlite having a fixed flash head
and wireless sensor, make sure it fires, then take the picture.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
190
Easy Wireless Flash Shooting
An easy, basic, and fully-automatic wireless flash shooting is explained
below.
Fully Automatic Shooting with One External Speedlite
Steps 1 to 4 and 6 apply to all
wireless flash shooting. Therefore,
these steps are omitted in the other
wireless flash setups explained on
the pages hereafter.
resthe <I> button to raise the
t-in flash.
For wireless flash shooting, be sure
1
to raise the built-in flash.
Select [Flash control].
2
Under the [1] tab, select [Flash
control], then press <0>.
Select [Evaluative].
3
For [E-TTL II meter.], select
[Evaluative], then press <0>.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
191
Easy Wireless Flash Shooting
Select [Built-in flash func.
4 setting].
Select [Built-in flash func. setting],
then press <0>.
Select [EasyWireless].
For [Built-in flash], select
5
[EasyWireless], then press <0>.
Set [Channel].
Set the channel (1-4) to the same one
6
as the slave unit.
Take tictue.
7
ith normal flash shooting, you
set the camera and take the
picture in the same way.
Exit the wireless flash shooting.
For [Built-in flash func. setting],
select [NormalFiring].
8
Setting [E-TTL II meter.] to [Evaluative] is recommended.
With [EasyWireless], even if you disable the built-in flash from firing, it
will still fire to control the slave unit. Depending on shooting conditions,
the flash fired to control the slave unit may appear in the picture.
Firing a test flash is not possible with the slave unit.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
192
Easy Wireless Flash Shooting
Fully-automatic Shooting with Multiple External Speedlites
You can have multiple slave units fire as if they were a single Speedlite.
Convenient when you need a large flash output.
Basic settings:
Flash mode
: E-TTL II
E-TTL II meter. : Evaluative
Built-in flash : EasyWireless
Channel
: (Same as slave units)
All the slave units will fire at the same
output and be controlled to obtain a
standard exposure.
No matter hat the slave ID is (A, B, or
C), e slae units will fire as one
up
Flash Exposure Compensation
If the flash exposure looks too dark or too bright, you can set flash
exposure compensation to adjust the slave units’ flash output.
Select [Flash exposure
compensation], then press <0>.
If the flash exposure is too dark,
press the <Z> key to increase the
flash exposure and make it brighter. If
the flash exposure is too bright, press
the <Y> key to decrease the flash
exposure and make it darker.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
193
Custom Wireless Flash Shooting
Fully-automatic Shooting with One External Speedlite and
Built-in Flash
This describes fully-automatic wireless
flash shooting with one external
Speedlite and the built-in flash.
You can change the flash ratio between
the external Speedlite and built-in flash
to adjust how the shadows look on the
subject.
On the menu screens, the <0> and
<1> icons refer to the external
Speedlite, and the <3> and <2>
icons refer to te built-in flash.
Select stWreless].
1
ow step 5 on page 192 to select
tWireless], then press <0>.
Select [Wireless func.].
2
For [Wireless func.], select [0:3],
then press <0>.
Set the desired flash ratio and
3 take the picture.
Select [0:3] and set the flash ratio
within 8:1 to 1:1. Setting a flash ratio to
the right of 1:1 (up to 1:8) is not possible.
If the built-in flash output is not
enough, set a higher ISO speed (p.79).
The 8:1 to 1:1 flash ratio is equivalent to 3:1 to 1:1 stops (1/2-stop
increments).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
194
Custom Wireless Flash Shooting
Fully-automatic Shooting with Multiple External Speedlites
Multiple Speedlite slave units can be treated as one flash unit or
separated into slave groups whose flash ratio can be set.
The basic settings are shown below. By changing the [Firing group]
setting, you can shoot with various wireless flash setups with multiple
Speedlites.
Basic settings:
Flash mode
: E-TTL II
E-TTL II meter. : Evaluative
Wireless func. : 0
Channel
: (Same as slave units)
[1All] Using multiple slave Speedles as one flash unit
Conent when you need a large flash
putAll the slave Speedlites will fire at
ame output and be controlled to
obtain a standard exposure.
No matter what the slave ID is (A, B, or
C), all the slave units will fire as one
group.
Set [Firing group] to [1All], then
take the picture.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
195
Custom Wireless Flash Shooting
[1 (A:B)] Multiple slave units in multiple groups
Divide the slave units into groups A and
B, and change the flash ratio to obtain
the desired lighting effect.
Refer to your Speedlite’s instruction
manual to set one slave unit’s slave ID
to A (Group A) and the other slave unit’s
ID to B (Group B) and position them as
shown in the illustration.
A
B
Select [Wireless func.].
Follow step on page 194 to select
[0en pess <0>.
1
Sring group] to [1 (A:B)].
2
Set the desired flash ratio and
3 take the picture.
Select [A:B fire ratio] and set the
flash ratio.
If [Firing group] is set to [1 (A:B)], group C will not fire.
The 8:1 to 1:1 to 1:8 flash ratio is equivalent to 3:1 to 1:1 to 1:3 stops (1/2-
stop increments).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
196
Custom Wireless Flash Shooting
Fully-automatic Shooting with the Built-in Flash and
Multiple External Speedlites
The built-in flash can also be added to wireless flash shooting explained
on pages 195-196.
The basic settings are shown below. By changing the [Firing group]
setting, you can shoot with various wireless flash setups of multiple
Speedlites complemented with the built-in flash.
Basic settings:
1
Flash mode
: E-TTL II
E-TTL II meter. : Evaluative
Wireless func. : [0+3]
Channel
: (Same as slave units)
Sele[Firing group].
Sect the firing group, then set the
ash ratio, flash exposure
2
ompensation, and other necessary
settings before shooting.
A
B
[1All and 2]
[1 (A:B) 2]
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
197
Other Settings
Flash Exposure Compensation
When [Flash mode] is set to [E-TTL II], flash exposure compensation
can be set. The flash exposure compensation settings (see below)
which can be set will differ depending on the [Wireless func.] and
[Firing group] settings.
[Flash exp. comp]
The flash exposure compensation is
applied to the built-in flash and all
external Speedlites.
[2 exp. comp.]
The flash exposure compensation is
applied to the built-in flash.
[1 exp. comp.]
The exposure compensation is
plieto all external Speedlites.
[Axp. comp.]
The flash exposure compensation is
applied to both groups A and B.
FE Lock
If [Flash mode] is set to [E-TTL II], you can press the <A> button to
perform FE lock.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
198
Other Settings
Setting the Flash Output Manually for Wireless Flash
When [Flash mode] is set to [Manual flash], the flash output can be set
manually. The flash output settings ([1 flash output], [Group A
output], etc.) that can be set will differ depending on the [Wireless
func.] setting (see below).
[Wireless func.: 0]
[Firing group: 1All]: The manual
flash output setting will be applied to
all the external Speedlites.
[Firing group: 1 (A:B)]: You can set
the flash output separately for slave
groups A and B.
[Wireless func.: 0+3]
[Firing goup: 1All and 2]: The
floutpt can be set separately for
the external Speedlite(s) and built-in
ash.
[Firing group: 1 (A:B) 2]: You can
set the flash output separately for
slave groups A and B. You can also
set the flash output for the built-in
flash.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
199
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Image Playback
This chapter explains features reted o viewing photos
and movies, going into more dethan in Chapter 2
“Basic Shooting and Imagyback.” Here you will
find explanations abut hoplayback and erase
photos and movies wth the camera and viewing them
on a TV set.
About images taken with another camera:
The camera might not be able to properly display images captured
with a different camera or edited with a computer or whose file name
was changed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
201
x Searching for Images Quickly
H
Display Multiple Images on One Screen (Index display)
Search for images quickly with the index display showing four or nine
images on one screen.
Playback the image.
When you press the <x> button, the
1
last image captured will be displayed.
Switch to the index display.
2
Press the <I> button.
X The 4-image index display will
appear. The currently-selected image
will be ighlihted in a blue frame.
Prese <I> button again to
ch o the 9-image index display.
sing the <u> button will switch
the display between 9 images, 4
images and one image displayed.
Î
Î
Select an image.
Press the <S> key to move the blue
frame to select an image.
3
Turning the <6> dial will display the
next screen or previous image.
Press <0> and the selected image
will be displayed as a single image.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
202
x Searching for Images Quickly
I Jump through Images (Jump display)
With the single image display, you can turn the <6> dial to jump
through the images forward or back according to the jump method that
was set.
Select [Image jump w/6].
1
Under the [4] tab, select [Image
jump w/6], then press <0>.
Select the jump method.
2
Press the <S> key to select the
jump method, then press <0>.
d: Display images one by one
e: Jum10 images
f: Jum100 images
gisplay by date
h: Display by folder
i: Display movies only
j: Display stills only
k: Display by image rating (p.206)
Turn the <6> dial to select the
rating.
Browse by jumping.
3
Press the <x> button to playback
images.
Jump method
On the single-image display, turn the
Playback position
<6> dial.
To search images according to the shooting date, select [Date].
To search images according to folder, select [Folder].
If the card contains both [Movies] and [Stills], select either one to
display only movies or stills.
If no images match the selected [Rating], browsing through the images
with <6> is not possible.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
203
u/y Magnified View
You can magnify a shot image by 1.5x to 10x on the LCD monitor.
Magnify the image.
During image playback, press the
1
<u> button.
X The image will be magnified.
If you hold down the <u> button, the
image will be magnified until it
reaches the maximum magnification.
Press the <I> button to reduce
the magnification. If you hold down
the button, the magnification will be
reduced to the single image display.
Magnified area position
Scroll und the image.
2
the <S> key to scroll around the
nified image.
To exit the magnified display, press
the <x> button and the single image
display will return.
You can turn the <6> dial to view another image while the
magnification is maintained.
The image cannot be magnified during the image review immediately
after shooting.
A movie cannot be magnified.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
204
b Rotating the Image
You can rotate the displayed image to the desired orientation.
Select [Rotate].
Under the [3] tab, select [Rotate],
1
then press <0>.
Select an image.
Press the <U> key to select the
2
image to be rotated.
You can also select an image on the
index display (p.202).
Rotate the image.
3
Etime you press <0>, the
mage will rotate clockwise as follows:
0° → 270° → 0°
To rotate another image, repeat steps
2 and 3.
To exit and return to the menu, press
the <M> button.
If you have set [5 Auto rotate] to [OnzD] (p.174) before taking
vertical shots, you need not rotate the image as described above.
If the rotated image is not displayed in the rotated orientation during
image playback, set [5 Auto rotate] to [OnzD].
A movie cannot be rotated.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
205
3 Setting Ratings
You can rate images and movies with one of five rating marks: l/m/
n/o/p.
Select [Rating].
Under the [4] tab, select [Rating],
1
then press <0>.
Select an image or movie.
2
Press the <U> key to select an
image or movie to be rated.
You can display three images by
pressing the <I> button. To
return to the single-image display,
pres<u> button.
Rhe image or movie.
3
s the <V> key to select a
rating.
X The total number of images and
movies rated will be counted for each
rating.
To rate another image or movie,
repeat steps 2 and 3.
To exit and return to the menu, press
the <M> button.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
206
3 Setting Ratings
The total number of a rating can be displayed up to 999. If there are 1,000 or
more images for a rating, [###] will be displayed.
Taking advantage of ratings
With [4 Image jump w/6], you can display only the rated images and
movies.
With [4 Slide show], you can playback only the rated images and
movies.
With Digital Photo Professional (provided software, p.302), you can
select only the rated images and movies.
With Windows Vista and Windows 7, you can see the rating with the file
information display or the provided image viewer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
207
QQuick Control During Playback
During playback, you can press the <Q> button to set any of the
following: [
Protect images], [b Rotate], [9 Rating], [U Creative
filters], [S Resize (JPEG images only)], and [e Image jump w/6].
For movies, only the functions in bold above can be set.
Press the <Q> button.
1
During image playback, press the
<Q> button.
X The functions settable with Quick
Control will appear on the left of the
screen.
Select a function and set it.
2
Press the <V> key to select a
function.
X The name ad current setting of the
selefuncion are displayed at the
tom
by pressing the <U> key.
For Creative filters and Resize, press
<0> and set the function. For
details, see page 230 for Creative
filters and page 233 for Resize. To
cancel, press the <M> button.
Exit the setting.
Press the <Q> button to turn off the
3
Quick Control icons and function
settings.
To rotate an image, set [5 Auto rotate] to [OnPD]. If [5 Auto rotate] is
set to [OnD] or [Off], the [b Rotate] setting will be recorded to the image,
but the camera will not rotate the image for display.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
208
QQuick Control During Playback
Pressing the <Q> button during the index display will switch to the
single-image display and the Quick Control icons will appear. Pressing
the <Q> button again will return to the index display.
For images taken with another camera, selectable functions may be
limited.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
209
kEnjoying Movies
Basically, you can playback movies in the following three ways:
Playback on a TV set
(p.218, 221)
Use the provided AV cable or an HDMI
Cable HTC-100 (sold separately) to
connect the camera to a TV set. Then
you can playback the captured movies
and still photos on the TV.
If you have a High-Definition TV set and
connect your camera with an HDMI
cable, you can watch Full High-Definition
(Full HD: 1920x1080) and High-
Definition (HD: 1280x720) movies with
higher image qality.
Movies on a card can be played onlevics compatible with MOV
files.
Since hard disk recorders do ve n HDMI IN terminal, the camera
cannot be connected ta hard ecorder with an HDMI cable.
Even if the camera is cnnected to a hard disk recorder with a USB
cable, movies and still photos cannot be played nor saved.
Playback on the Camera’s LCD Monitor
(p.212-217)
You can playback movies on the
camera’s LCD monitor. You can also edit
out the movie’s first and last scenes, and
playback the images and movies in the
card in an automatic slide show.
A movie edited with a personal computer cannot be rewritten to the card and
played back with the camera. However, video snapshot albums edited with
ZoomBrowser EX/ImageBrowser (provided software) can be played on the
camera.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
210
kEnjoying Movies
Playback and Editing with a Personal Computer
(See the PDF file instruction manual for ZoomBrowser EX/ImageBrowser, p.304)
The movie files recorded in the card can
be transferred to a personal computer
and played or edited with ZoomBrowser
EX/ImageBrowser (provided software,
p.302).
You can also extract a single frame from
a movie and save it as a still photo.
To have the movie playback smoothly on a personal computer, use a
high-performance personal computer. Regarding the computer hardware
requirements for ZoomBrowser EX/ImageBrowser, see the PDF file
instruction manual.
If you want to use commercially-able sotware to playback or edit the
movies, be sure it is compwitMOV files. For details on
commercially-available soinquire the software maker.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
211
kPlaying Movies
Playback the image.
Press the <x> button to display
1
images.
Select a movie.
2
Press the <
On the single-image display, the
1s> icon displayed on the upper left
indicates a movie. If the movie is a video
snapshot, < > will be displayed.
U> key to select a movie.
<
s
You can press the <C> button to
switch the shooting information
display (p.27).
On tex dplay, the perforation on
left dge of the image indicates a
e. As movies cannot be played on
the index display, press <0> to
switch to the single-image display.
On the single-image display,
3 press <0>.
X The movie playback panel will appear
on the bottom.
Playback the movie.
4
Select [7] (Play), then press <0>.
Speaker
X The movie will start playing.
You can pause the movie playback by
pressing <0>.
During movie playback, you can turn
the <6> dial to adjust the built-in
speaker’s sound volume.
For more details on the playback
procedure, see the next page.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
212
kPlaying Movies
Function
2Exit
Playback Description
Returns to the single-image display.
7Play
Pressing <0> toggles between play and stop.
Adjust the slow motion speed by pressing the <U> key.
8Slow motion
5First frame
3Previous frame
The slow-motion speed is indicated on the upper right.
Displays the movie’s first frame.
Each time you press <0>, a single previous frame is
displayed. If you hold down <0>, it will rewind the movie.
Each time you press <0>, the movie will play frame-by-
frame. If you hold down <0>, it will fast forward the
movie.
6Next frame
4Last frame
XEdit
Displays the movie’s last frame.
Displays the editing screen (p.214).
Background
music*
Playback a movie with the selected background music
(p.217).
Playback position
mm’ ss”
Playback tines:seconds)
You can adjbuilt-in speaker’s (p.212) sound volume
by trning the <6> dial.
9Volume
* When a background music is se, the movie’s sound will not be played.
3 Bass Boost
This makes low-pitched bass tones easier to hear. This function takes
effect only when playing back sound with the camera’s built-in speaker.
Set [4 Bass boost] to [Enable].
If the sound crackles, you should set
[Bass boost] to [Disable].
With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E8, the continuous playback time
will be approx. 2 hr. 30 min. at 23°C/73°F.
If you took a still photo while you shot the movie, the still photo will be
displayed for approx. 1 sec. during the movie playback.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
213
XEditing a Movie’s First and Last Scenes
You can edit out the first and last scenes of a movie in 1-sec. increments.
On the movie playback screen,
select [X].
X The editing screen will be displayed.
1
Specify the part to be edited out.
2
Select either [U] (Cut beginning) or
[V] (Cut end), then press <0>.
Press the <U> key to see the
previous or next frames. Holding it
down will fast forward the frames.
After deciding which part to edit out,
press <0>. The portion highlighted
in blue on the top of the screen is
what will reain.
Check edited movie.
3
ct [7] and press <0> to playback
ortion highlighted in blue.
To change the editing, go back to step 2.
To cancel the editing, select [2] and
press <0>.
Save the movie.
4
Select [W], then press <0>.
X The save screen will appear.
To save it as a new movie, select
[New file]. To save it and overwrite
the original movie file, select
[Overwrite]. Then press <0>.
Since the editing is done in 1-sec. increments (position indicated by [
X]), the exact
position where the movie is edited may differ slightly from the position you specified.
If the card does not have enough room, [New file] will not be selectable.
More movie editing functions are available with ZoomBrowser EX/
ImageBrowser (provided software, p.302).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
214
3 Slide Show (Auto Playback)
You can playback the images in the card as an automatic slide show.
Select [Slide show].
1
Under the [4] tab, select [Slide
show], then press <0>.
Select the images to be played.
Press the <V> key to select the
desired option, then press <0>.
Number of images to be played
2
[All images/Movies/Stills]
Press the <V> key to select one of
the following: [jAll images/
kMovies/zStills]. Then press
<0>.
[Date/Foler/Rating]
Pthe V> key to select one of
he ollowing: [iDate/nFolder/
ating].
When <xH> is highlighted,
press the <C> button.
Press the <V> key to select the
desired option, then press <0>.
Item
Playback Description
jAll images All the still photos and movies in the card will be played back.
Still photos and movies taken on the selected shooting date
will be played back.
iDate
nFolder
kMovies
zStills
Still photos and movies in the selected folder will be played back.
Only the movies in the card will be played back.
Only the still photos in the card will be played back.
Only the still photos and movies with the selected rating will
be played back.
9Rating
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
215
3 Slide Show (Auto Playback)
Set [Set up] as desired.
Press the <V> key to select [Set
up], then press <0>.
3
Set the [Display time] (still photos),
[Repeat], [Transition effect], and
[Background music].
The background music selection
procedure is explained on the next
page.
After selecting the settings, press the
<M> button.
[Display time]
[Repeat]
[Transition effect]
[Background music]
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
216
3 Slide Show (Auto Playback)
Start the slide show.
Press the <V> key to select [Start],
then press <0>.
X After [Loading image...] is displayed,
the slide show will start.
4
5
Quit the slide show.
To quit the slide show and return to the
setting screen, press the < > button.
M
Selecting the Background Music
Set [Background music] to [On],
then press <0>.
Press the <V> key to select the
desired background music then press
<0>. Yu can also select multiple
bround musics.
To hear a sample of a bacnd music, press the <C> button.
Press the <V> keto listeanother background music. To stop
listening to the background music, press the <C> button again.
Adjust the sound volume by turning the <6> dial.
After selecting the setting, press the <M> button.
To pause the slide show, press <0>. During pause, [G] will be displayed
on the upper left of the image. Press <0> again to resume the slide show.
During auto playback, you can press the <C> button to change the
still photo display format (p.71).
During movie playback, you can adjust the sound volume by turning the
<6> dial.
During pause, you can press the <U> key to view another image.
During the slide show, auto power off will not take effect.
The display time may vary depending on the image.
To view the slide show on a TV set, see pages 218.
Upon purchase, the camera is not set for selecting the background
music. You must first use EOS Utility (provided software) to copy the
background music to the card. For details, see the EOS Utility Instruction
Manual in the CD-ROM.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
217
Viewing the Images on TV
You can view the still photos and movies on a TV set.
Adjust the movie’s sound volume with the TV set. The sound volume
cannot be adjusted with the camera.
Before connecting or disconnecting the cable between the camera and
television, turn off the camera and TV set.
Depending on the TV set, part of the image displayed might be cut off.
Viewing on HD (High-Definition) TV Sets
HDMI Cable HTC-100 (sold separately) is required.
Connect the HDMI cable to the
camera.
With the plug’s <dHDMI MINI> logo
facing the frnt of the camera, insert it
into <D> terminal.
1
Connect the HDMI cable to the TV
2 set.
Connect the HDMI cable to the TV’s
HDMI IN port.
Turn on the TV and switch the
3 TV’s video input to select the
connected port.
Set the camera’s power switch to
4 <1>.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
218
Viewing the Images on TV
Press the <x> button.
5
X The image will appear on the TV
screen (Nothing will be displayed on
the camera’s LCD monitor).
The images will automatically be
displayed at the TV’s optimum resolution.
By pressing the <C> button, you
can change the display format.
To playback movies, see page 212.
Do not connect any other device’s output to the camera’s <D>
terminal. Doing so may cause a malfunction.
Certain TVs might not be able to playback the captured images. In such
a case, use the provided AV cable to connect to the TV.
The camera’s <q > terminal and D> terminal cannot
be used at the same time.
Using HDMI CEC TV Se
If the TV set connected to the camera with an HDMI cable is compatible with
HDMI CEC*, you can use the TV set’s remote control for playback operations.
* An HDMI-standard function enabling HDMI devices to control each other so that
you can control them with one remote control unit.
Set [Ctrl over HDMI] to [Enable].
1
Under the [4] tab, select [Ctrl over
HDMI], then press <0>.
Select [Enable], then press <0>.
Connect the camera to a TV set.
2
Use an HDMI cable to connect the
camera to the TV.
X The TV’s input will switch
automatically to the HDMI port
connected to the camera.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
219
Viewing the Images on TV
Press the camera’s <x> button.
3
X An image will appear on the TV
screen and you can use the TV’s
remote control to playback images.
Select an image or movie.
4
Point the remote control toward the
TV set and press the ꢀ/ꢁ button to
select an image.
Press the remote control’s Enter
Still photo playback menu
Movie playback menu
5 button.
X The menu appears and you can do
the playback operations shown on the
left.
Press he ꢀꢁ button to select the
desirption, then press the Enter
onFor a slide show, press the
te control’s ꢂ/ꢃ button to select
an option, then press the Enter
button.
: Return
: 9-image index
: Play movie
: Slide show
: Disp. shooting info
: Rotate
If you select [Return] and press the
Enter button, the menu will disappear
and you can use the ꢀ/ꢁ button to
select an image.
Some TV sets require you to first enable the HDMI CEC connection. For
details, see the TV set’s instruction manual.
Certain TV sets, even those compatible with HDMI CEC, may not
operate properly. In such a case, disconnect the HDMI cable, set [4
Ctrl over HDMI] to [Disable], and use the camera to control the
playback operation.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
220
Viewing the Images on TV
Viewing on Non-HD (High-Definition) TV Sets
Connect the provided AV cable to
the camera.
With the plug’s <Canon> logo facing
1
the back of the camera, insert it into
q
the <
> terminal.
Connect the AV cable to the TV
(Red)
2 set.
(White)
Connect the AV cable to the TV’s
video IN terminal and audio IN
terminal.
(Yellow)
Turn on the TV and switch the
3 TV’s ideo input to select the
concted port.
the camera’s power switch to
4 <1>.
Press the <x> button.
X The image will appear on the TV
5
screen (Nothing will be displayed on
the camera’s LCD monitor).
To playback movies, see page 212.
Do not use any AV cable other than the one provided. Images might not
be displayed if you use a different cable.
If the video system format does not match the TV’s, the images will not
be displayed properly. Set the proper video system format with [6 Video
system].
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
221
K Protecting Images
Protecting an image prevents it from being erased accidentally.
3 Protecting a Single Image
Select [Protect images].
1
Under the [3] tab, select [Protect
images], then press <0>.
X The protect setting screen will
appear.
Select [Select images].
2
Select [Select images], then press
<0>.
Image protect icon
Pct he image.
s the <U> key to select the
3
image to be protected, then press
<0>.
X When an image is protected, the
<K> icon will appear on the top of
the screen.
To cancel the image protection, press
<0> again. The <K> icon will
disappear.
To protect another image, repeat step
3.
To exit the image protection, press
the <M> button. The menu will
reappear.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
222
K Protecting Images
3 Protecting All Images in a Folder or Card
You can protect all the images in a folder or card at one time.
When you select [All images in folder]
or [All images on card] in [3 Protect
images], all the images in the folder or
card will be protected.
To cancel the image protection, select
[Unprotect all images in folder] or
[Unprotect all images on card].
If you format the card (p.45), the protected images will also be erased.
Movies can also be protected.
Once an image is protected, it cannot be erased by the camera’s erase
function. To erase a protected image, you must first cancel the
protection.
If you erase all the images (p.225), only the protected images will
remain. This is convenient when you want to erase unnecessary images
all at once.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
223
L Erasing Images
You can either select and erase images one by one or erase them in
one batch. Protected images (p.222) will not be erased.
Once an image is erased, it cannot be recovered. Make sure
you no longer need the image before erasing it. To prevent
important images from being erased accidentally, protect
them. Erasing a 1+73 image will erase both the 1 and
73 images.
Erasing a Single Image
Playback the image to be erased.
1
Press the <L> button.
2
X The erase dalog will appear at the
bottom of thscreen.
Erase timages.
ct Erase], then press <0>. The
3
e displayed will be erased.
3 Checkmarking <X> Images to be Erased in a Batch
By checkmarking the images to be erased, you can erase multiple
images at one time.
Select [Erase images].
1
Under the [3] tab, select [Erase
images], then press <0>.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
224
L Erasing Images
Select [Select and erase images].
Select [Select and erase images],
then press <0>.
X The images will be displayed.
To display the three-image display,
press the <I> button. To return to
the single-image display, press the
<u> button.
2
3
4
Select the images to be erased.
Press the <U> key to select the
image to be erased, then press the
<V> key.
X A <X> checkmark will be displayed
on the uper left.
Tect oher images to be erased,
epat step 3.
se the images.
Press the <L> button.
Select [OK], then press <0>.
X The selected images will be erased.
3 Erasing All Images in a Folder or Card
You can erase all the images in a folder or card at one time. When [3
Erase images] is set to [All images in folder] or [All images on card],
all the images in the folder or card will be erased.
To also erase protected images, format the card (p.45).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
225
C Shooting Information Display
Sample Image Taken in a Creative Zone Mode
Protect
Exposure compensation amount
Rating
Flash exposure
Folder number - File number
compensation amount
Aperture
Histogram
(Brightness/RGB)
Shutter speed
Picture Style/Settings
Metering mode
Shooting mode
ISO speed
Highlight tone priority
White balance
Color space
Shooting date and
time
Image-recording
quality
Playback number/
Total images recorded
hitbalance correction
File size
Eye-Fi transmission
* With 1+73 images, the 1 file size is displayed.
* For still photos taken in movie shooting mode, <G> will be displayed.
* If a Creative filter or Resize has been applied to the image, the <1+> icon will
change to <u>.
* Photos taken with flash without any flash exposure compensation are marked
with the < > icon. Photos taken with flash exposure compensation are marked
with the <y> icon.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
226
C Shooting Information Display
Sample Image Taken in a Basic Zone Mode
Ambience and
ambience effects
Shooting mode
Lighting or scene
* For images taken in Basic Zone modes, the information displayed differ
depending on the shooting mode.
* Photos taken in the <C> mode will show [Background blur].
Sample Movie Taken in Movie Mod
Shooting time
Movie/Playback
Shutter speed and
aperture for movie
shooting
Movie shooting
mode
Movie file size
Recording
system
Movie recording
Size
Frame rate
* If manual exposure was used, the shutter speed, aperture, and ISO speed
(when set manually) will be displayed.
* The < > icon will be displayed for a video snapshot.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
227
C Shooting Information Display
About the Highlight Alert
When the shooting information is displayed, any overexposed areas of the
image will blink. To obtain more image detail in the overexposed areas, set
the exposure compensation to a negative amount and shoot again.
About the Histogram
The brightness histogram shows the exposure level distribution and
overall brightness. The RGB histogram is for checking the color
saturation and gradation. The display can be switched with [4
Histogram].
[Brightness] Display
Sample Histograms
This histogram is a graph showing the distribution of
the image’s brightness level. The horizontal axis
indicates the brightness level (darker on the left and
brighter on the right), while the vertical axis indiates
how many pixels exist for each brightness levelThe
more pixels there are toward the left, thker the
image. And the more pixels there owad the right,
the brighter the image. If there arany pixels on
the left, the shadow detail will be lost. And if there are
too many pixels on the right, the highlight detail will be
lost. The gradation in-between will be reproduced. By
checking the image and its brightness histogram, you
Dark image
Normal brightness
Bright image
can see the exposure level inclination and the overall gradation.
[RGB] Display
This histogram is a graph showing the distribution of each primary color’s
brightness level in the image (RGB or red, green, and blue). The horizontal
axis indicates the color’s brightness level (darker on the left and brighter
on the right), while the vertical axis indicates how many pixels exist for
each color brightness level. The more pixels there are toward the left, the
darker and less prominent the color. And the more pixels there are toward
the right, the brighter and denser the color. If there are too many pixels on
the left, the respective color information will be lacking. And if there are too
many pixels on the right, the color will be too saturated with no detail. By
checking the image’s RGB histogram, you can see the color’s saturation
and gradation condition and white balance inclination.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
228
Post-Processing
Images
After shooting, you can apply Crative filters or resize
the images (downsize the pixel unt).
It may not be possible to process images shot with a different
camera.
Post-processing images as described in this chapter cannot be
done while the camera is connected to a personal computer
via the <C> terminal.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
229
U Creative Filters
You can apply the following Creative filters to an image and save it as a
new image: Grainy B/W, Soft focus, Fish-eye effect, Toy camera effect,
and Miniature effect.
Select [Creative filters].
1
Under the [3] tab, select [Creative
filters], then press <0>.
X The images will be displayed.
Select an image.
Select the image you want to apply a
2
filter to.
By pressing the <I> button, you
can switch tthe index display and
seleimage.
Sa filter.
n you press <0>, the Creative
3
filters will be displayed.
For details on Creative filter
characteristics, see page 232.
Press the <U> key to select a filter,
then press <0>.
X The image applied with the respective
filter will be displayed.
Adjust the filter effect.
4
Press the <U> key to adjust the
filter effect, then press <0>.
For the Miniature effect, press the
<V> key and select the image area
(within the white frame) where you
want the image to look sharp. Then
press <0>.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
230
U Creative Filters
Save the image.
5
Select [OK] to save the image.
Note the destination folder and image
file number, then select [OK].
To apply a filter to another image,
repeat steps 2 to 5.
To exit and return to the menu, press
the <M> button.
With 1 or 1+73 images, the 1 image will be applied with the
Creative filter and saved as a JPEG image. If an aspect ratio has been set
for Live View shooting and a Creative filter is applied to the 1 image, the
image will be saved in the aspect ratio that was set.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
231
U Creative Filters
Creative Filter Features
Grainy B/W
Makes the image grainy and black and white. By adjusting the
contrast, you can change the black-and-white effect.
Soft focus
Gives the image a soft look. By adjusting the blur, you can change
the degree of softness.
Fish-eye effect
Gives the effect of a fish-eye lens. The image will have a barrel-type
distortion.
Depending on the level of this filter effect, the area trimmed along
the periphery of the image changes. Also, since this filter effect will
magnify the image center, the apparent resolution at the center may
degrade depending on the number of recoded pixels. So in step 4,
set the filter effect while checking tsultig image.
Toy camera effect
Gives a color cast typical of tomeras and darkens the image’s
fours corners. By adjusng the color tone, you can change the color
cast.
Miniature effect
Creates a diorama effect. You can change where the image looks
sharp. In step 4, you can press the <C> button to change the
orientation (vertical/horizontal) of the white frame that shows where
you want the image to look sharp.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
232
S Resize
You can resize an image to make the pixel count lower and save it as a
new image. Resizing an image is possible only with JPEG 3/4/a/b
images. JPEG c and RAW images cannot be resized.
Select [Resize].
Under the [3] tab, select [Resize],
1
then press <0>.
X The images will be displayed.
Select an image.
Select the image you want to resize.
By pressing the <I> button, you
can switch to the index display and
select an image.
2
lecthe desired image size.
3
ress <0> to display the image
sizes.
Press the <U> key to select the
desired image size, then press <0>.
Target sizes
Save the image.
4
Select [OK] to save the image.
Note the destination folder and image
file number, then select [OK].
To resize another image, repeat steps
2 to 4.
To exit and return to the menu, press
the <M> button.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
233
S Resize
Resize Options According to Original Image Size
Available Resize Settings
Original Image Size
4
a
k
k
b
k
k
k
c
k
k
k
k
3
4
k
a
b
c
About Image Sizes
Images such as the [8.0M 3456x2304] image size displayed in step 3
(p.233) have a 3:2 aspect ratio. The image size according to aspect
ratios is shown in the table below. The asterised image-recording
quality figures do not exactly match the aspecratio. The image will be
slightly cropped.
Aspect RatiPixl Count (Approx.)
Quality
3:2
4:3
16:9
1:1
3456x2304
30722304
3456x1944
2304x2304
4
a
(8.0 megapixels) (7.0 megapixels) (6.7 megapixels) (5.3 megapixels)
2592x1728 2304x1728 2592x1456* 1728x1728
(4.5 megapixels) (4.0 megapixels) (3.8 megapixels) (3.0 megapixels)
1920x1280 1696x1280* 1920x1080 1280x1280
(2.5 megapixels) (2.2 megapixels) (2.1 megapixels) (1.6 megapixels)
720x480 640x480 720x400* 480x480
(350,000 pixels) (310,000 pixels) (290,000 pixels) (230,000 pixels)
b
c
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
234
Printing Images
Printing (p.236)
You can connect the camirely to a printer and print
out the images in the cardcamera is compatible with
“wPictBridge” which is the standard for direct printing.
Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) (p.245)
DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) enables you to print
images recorded in the card according to your printing
instructions such as the image selection, quantity to print,
etc. You can print multiple images in one batch or give the
print order to a photofinisher.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
235
Preparing to Print
The direct printing procedure is done entirely with the camera
while you look at the LCD monitor.
Connecting the Camera to a Printer
Set the camera’s power switch to
<2>.
1
Set up the printer.
2
For details, see the printer’s
instruction manual.
Connecting he camera to the
3 printe
e tinterface cable provided with
amera.
Cnnect the cable to the camera’s
<C> terminal with the cable
plug’s <D> icon facing the front of
the camera.
To connect to the printer, refer to the
printer’s instruction manual.
Turn on the printer.
4
Set the camera’s power switch to
5 <1>.
X Some printers may make a beeping
sound.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
236
Preparing to Print
Playback the image.
Press the <x> button.
X The image will appear, and the <w>
icon will appear on the upper left to
indicate that the camera is connected
to a printer.
wPictBridge
6
Movies cannot be printed.
The camera cannot be used with printers compatible only with CP Direct
or Bubble Jet Direct.
Do not use any interface cable other than the one provided.
If there is a long beeping sound in step 5, it indicates a problem with the
printer. Resolve the problem displayed by the error message (p.244).
You can also print RAW images taken with this camera.
If you use a battery pack to power the camera, make sure it is fully
charged. With a fully-charged battery, printing up to about 4 hours is
possible.
Before disconnecting the cable, first turn off the camera and printer. Hold
the plug (not the cord) to pull out the cable.
For direct printing, using AC Adapter Kit ACK-E8 (sold separately) to
power the camera is recommended.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
237
wPrinting
The screen display and setting options will differ depending on the
printer. Some settings might not be available. For details, see the
printer’s instruction manual.
Printer-connected icon
Select the image to be printed.
Check that the <w> icon is
1
displayed on the upper left of the LCD
monitor.
Press the <U> key to select the
image to be printed.
Press <
0>.
2
X The print setting screen will appear.
Print setting screen
Sets the prinineffects (p.240).
Sets the or le number imprinting to on
or off.
e qantity to be printed.
See trimming (cropping) (p.243).
Sets the paper size, type, and layout.
Returns to the screen in step 1.
Starts the printing.
The paper size, type, and layout you have set are displayed.
* Depending on the printer, certain settings such as the date and file
number imprinting and trimming might not be selectable.
Select [Paper settings].
3
Select [Paper settings], then press
<0>.
X The paper settings screen will
appear.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
238
wPrinting
Q Setting the Paper Size
Select the size of the paper loaded in
the printer, then press <0>.
X The paper type screen will appear.
Y Setting the Paper Type
Select the type of the paper loaded in
the printer, then press <0>.
X The page layout screen will appear.
U Setting the Page Layout
Select the page layout, then press
<0>.
X Trint etting screen will reappear.
Bordered
The print wll have borders along the edges.
The print wll have no borders. If your printer cannot print
borderless prints, the print will have borders.
Borderless
The shooting information*1 will be imprinted on the border on
9x13cm and larger prints.
Borderedc
xx-up
Option to print 2, 4, 8, 9, 16, or 20 images on one sheet.
*2
Twenty or 35 images will be printed as thumbnails on A4 or Letter size paper
.
20-upc
35-upp
• [20-upc] will have the shooting information*1 imprinted.
Default
The page layout will vary depending on the printer model or its settings.
*1:From the Exif data, the camera name, lens name, shooting mode, shutter speed, aperture,
exposure compensation amount, ISO speed, white balance, etc., will be imprinted.
*2:After ordering the prints with “Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)” (p.245), you should
print by following “Direct Printing with DPOF” (p.248).
If the image’s aspect ratio is different from the printing paper’s aspect ratio,
the image may be cropped significantly if you print it as a borderless print. If
the image is cropped, it may look more grainy on the paper due to the fewer
number of pixels.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
239
wPrinting
Set the printing effects.
4
Set as necessary. If you need not set
any printing effects, go to step 5.
What is displayed on the screen
differs depending on the printer.
Select the option on the upper right
(circled in the screenshot), then press
<0>.
Select the desired printing effect, then
press <0>.
If the <e> icon is displayed brightly
next to <x>, you can also adjust
the printing effect (p.242).
Printing Effect
Descron
The image will be printeordinto the printer’s standard
colors. The imageif da is used to make automatic
corrections.
EOn
EOff
No automic correcwill be applied.
The image will bprinted with higher saturation to produce
more vivid blues and greens.
EVIVID
ENR
Image noise is reduced before printing.
Prints in black-and-white with true blacks.
0 B/W
0 Cool tone Prints in black-and-white with cool, bluish blacks.
0 Warm tone Prints in black-and-white with warm, yellowish blacks.
Prints the image in the actual colors and contrast. No
zNatural
automatic color adjustments are applied.
The printing characteristics are the same as the “Natural”
zNatural M
EDefault
setting. However, this setting enables finer printing
adjustments than with “Natural.”
The printing will differ depending on the printer. For details,
see the printer’s instruction manual.
* When you change the printing effects, it is reflected in the image displayed on
the upper left. Note that the printed image might look slightly different from the
displayed image which is only an approximation. This also applies to
[Brightness] and [Adjust levels] on page 242.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
240
wPrinting
Set the date and file number
5 imprinting.
Set as necessary.
Select <I>, then press <0>.
Set as desired, then press <0>.
Set the number of copies.
Set as necessary.
Select <R>, then press <0>.
Set the number of copies, then press
<0>.
6
Start printng.
Select [int], then press <0>.
7
With Easy printing, you can print another image using the same settings.
Just select the image and press the <l> button. With Easy printing, the
number of copies will always be 1. (You cannot set the number of
copies.) Also, any trimming (p.243) will not be applied.
The [Default] setting for printing effects and other options are the
printer’s own default settings as set by the printer’s manufacturer. See
the printer’s instruction manual to find out what the [Default] settings are.
Depending on the image’s file size and image-recording quality, it may
take some time for the printing to start after you select [Print].
If image tilt correction (p.243) has been applied, it may take longer to
print the image.
To stop the printing, press <0> while [Stop] is displayed, then select
[OK].
If you execute [Clear all camera settings] (p.176), all the settings will
revert to the default.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
241
wPrinting
e Adjustment of Printing Effects
In step 4 on page 240, select the printing
effect. When the <e> icon is displayed
brightly next to <x>, you can press
the <C> button to adjust the printing
effect. What can be adjusted or what is
displayed will depend on the selection
made in step 4.
Brightness
The image brightness can be adjusted.
Adjust levels
When you select [Manual], you can chang
the histogram’s distribution and adjust the
image’s brightness and contrast.
With the Adjust levels screen ayd, press
the <C> button to change osition of
the <h>. Press the <U> key to freely adjust
the shadow level (0-127) or highlight level
(128-255).
kBrightener
Effective in backlit conditions which can make the subject’s face look
dark. When [On] is set, the face will be brightened for printing.
Red-eye corr.
Effective in flash images where the subject has red eye. When [On]
is set, the red eye will be corrected for printing.
The [kBrightener] and [Red-eye corr.] effects will not show on the screen.
When you select [Detail set.], you can adjust the [Contrast],
[Saturation], [Color tone], and [Color balance]. To adjust the [Color
balance], use the <S> keys. B is for blue, A is amber, M is magenta,
and G is green. The color in the respective direction will be corrected.
If you select [Clear all], all the printing effect settings will be reverted to
the default.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
242
wPrinting
Trimming the Image
You can crop the image and print only
Tilt correction
the trimmed portion as if the image was
recomposed. Do the trimming right
before printing. If you set the trimming
and then set the print settings, you may
have to set the trimming again.
1 On the print setting screen, select [Trimming].
2 Set the trimming frame size, position, and aspect ratio.
The image area within the trimming frame will be printed. The
trimming frame’s aspect ratio can be canged with [Paper settings].
Changing the trimming frame
When you press the <u<I> button, the size of the
trimming frame wl chanhe smaller the trimming frame, the
larger the image magniication will be for printing.
Moving the trimming frame
Press the <S> key to move the frame over the image vertically or
horizontally. Move the trimming frame until it covers the desired image area.
Rotating the frame
Pressing the <C> button will toggle the trimming frame
between the vertical and horizontal orientations. This enables you
to create a vertical-oriented print from a horizontal image.
Image tilt correction
By turning the <6> dial, you can adjust the image tilt angle up to
±10 degrees in 0.5-degree increments. When you adjust the
image tilt, the <O> icon on the screen will turn blue.
3 Press <0> to exit the trimming.
X The print setting screen will reappear.
You can check the trimmed image area on the upper left of the
print setting screen.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
243
wPrinting
Depending on the printer, the trimmed image area might not be printed
as you specified.
The smaller you make the trimming frame, the grainier the picture will
look in the print.
While trimming the image, look at the camera’s LCD monitor. If you look
at the image on a TV screen, the trimming frame might not be displayed
accurately.
Handling Printer Errors
If you resolve a printer error (no ink, no paper, etc.) and select [Continue] to
resume printing but it does not resume, operate the buttons on the printer to
resume printing. For details on resuming the printing, see the printer’s
instruction manual.
Error Messages
If a problem occurs during printing, an error mesage will appear on the
camera’s LCD monitor. Press <0> to printg. After fixing the
problem, resume printing. For details on to fix a printing problem, refer
to the printer’s instruction manua
Paper Error
Check whether the papeis prperly loaded in the printer.
Ink Error
Check the printer’s ink level, and check the waste ink tank.
Hardware Error
Check for any printer problems other than paper and ink problems.
File Error
The selected image cannot be printed via PictBridge. Images taken with a
different camera or images edited with a computer might not be printable.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
244
W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)
You can set the print type, date imprinting, and file No. imprinting. The
print settings will be applied to all print-ordered images. (They cannot
be set individually for each image.)
Setting the Printing Options
Select [Print order].
1
Under the [3] tab, select [Print
order], then press <0>.
Select [Set up].
Select [Set up], then press <0>.
2
Set the option as desired.
3
Set the [Print type], [Date], and [File
No.].
Select the option to be set, then press
<0>. Select the desired setting,
then press <0>.
[Print type]
[Date]
[File No.]
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
245
W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)
Standard Prints one image on one sheet.
K
L
K
L
Index
Multiple thumbnail images are printed on one sheet.
Print type
Both
Prints both the standard and index prints.
On
Date
[On] imprints the recorded date on the print.
[On] imprints the file No. on the print.
Off
On
Off
File number
Exit the setting.
4
Press the <7> button.
X The print order screen will reappear.
Next, select Sel.Image], [Byn], or
[All image] order the images to be
print
Even if [Date] and [File o.] e set to [On], the date or file No. might not
be imprinted depending on the print type setting and printer model.
When printing with DPOF, you must use the card whose print order
specifications have been set. It will not work if you just extract images
from the card and try to print them.
Certain DPOF-compatible printers and photofinishers might not be able
to print the images as you specified. If this happens with your printer,
refer to the printer’s instruction manual. Or check with your photofinisher
about compatibility when ordering prints.
Do not insert into the camera a card whose print order was set by a
different camera and then try to specify a print order. The print order may
not work or may be overwritten. Also, depending on the image type, the
print order may not be possible.
RAW images and movies cannot be print ordered. You can print RAW
images through direct printing (p.236).
With [Index] prints, both the [Date] and [File No.] cannot be set to [On]
at the same time.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
246
W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)
Print Ordering
Sel.Image
Select and order images one by one.
To display the three-image display, press
the <I> button. To return to the
single-image display, press the <u>
button.
After completing the print order, press
the <M> button to save the print
order to the card.
[Standard] [Both]
Press the <V> key to set the number of
copies to be printed for the displayed
image.
Quantity
Total images selected
[Inde
s the <V> key to checkmark the
<X> and the image will be included
in the index print.
Check mark
Index icn
Byn
Select [Mark all in folder] and select the folder. A print order for one
copy of all the images in the folder will be placed. If you select [Clear
all in folder] and select the folder, the print order for that folder will
all be canceled.
All image
If you select [Mark all on card], one copy of all the images in the
card will be set for printing. If you select [Clear all on card], the print
order will be cleared for all the images in the card.
Note that RAW images and movies will not be included in the print order
even if you set “Byn” or “All image.”
When using a PictBridge printer, print no more than 400 images for one
print order. If you specify more than this, all the images might not be
printed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
247
W Direct Printing with DPOF
With a PictBridge printer, you can easily
print images with DPOF.
1 Prepare to print.
See page 236. Follow the “Connecting the Camera to a Printer”
procedure up to step 5.
2 Under the [3] tab, select [Print order].
3 Select [Print].
[Print] will be displayed only if the camera is connected to a
printer and printing is possible.
4 Set the [Paper settings] (p.238
Set the printing effects (p.f ncessary.
5 Select [OK].
Before printing, be sure to set the paper size.
Certain printers cannot imprint the file No.
If [Bordered] is set, certain printers might imprint the date on the border.
Depending on the printer, the date might look light if it is imprinted on a
bright background or on the border.
Under [Adjust levels], [Manual] cannot be selected.
If you stopped the printing and want to resume printing the remaining
images, select [Resume]. Note that printing will not resume if you stop
the printing and any of the following occurs:
• Before resuming the printing, you changed the print order or deleted
print-ordered images.
• When you set the index, you changed the paper setting before
resuming the printing.
• When you paused the printing, the card’s remaining capacity was low.
If a problem occurs during printing, see page 244.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
248
Customizing the
Camera
You can customize various cama feaures to suit your
picture-taking preferences with stom Functions.
Custom Functions can be nd used only in Creative
Zone modes.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
249
3 Setting Custom FunctionsN
Select [Custom Functions (C.Fn)].
Under the [7] tab, select [Custom
Functions (C.Fn)], then press <0>.
1
Custom Function No.
Select the Custom Function No.
2
Press the <U> key to select the
Custom Function No., then press
<0>.
Change the etting as desired.
3
Prese <V> key to select the
ng (number), then press <0>.
eat steps 2 and 3 if you want to
set other Custom Functions.
At the bottom of the screen, the
current Custom Function settings are
indicated below the respective
function numbers.
Exit the setting.
Press the <M> button.
X The screen for step 1 will reappear.
4
Clearing All Custom Functions
Under [7 Clear settings], select [Clear all Custom Func. (C.Fn)] to
clear all the Custom Function settings (p.176).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
250
3 Setting Custom FunctionsN
Custom Functions
C.Fn I: Exposure
ALV shooting
1
2
3
Exposure level increments
ISO expansion
k
p.252
k
k
Flash sync. speed in Av mode
C.Fn II: Image
4
5
6
Long exposure noise reduction
p.253
p.254
k
k
k
High ISO speed noise reduction
Highlight tone priority
C.Fn III: Autofocus/Drive
7
8
AF-assist beam firing
Mirror lockup
k (With f*)
p.255
* If you use an EX-series Speeite (sold separately) equipped with a LED light,
the LED light will turn on for AF-assist even in the dand cmodes.
C.Fn IV: Operation/Others
9
Shutter/AE lock button
k
p.256
p.257
10 Assign SET button
k (Except 3)
11 LCD display when power ON
The shaded Custom Functions do not take effect during Live View (LV)
shooting. (Settings are disabled.)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
251
3 Custom Function SettingsN
Custom Functions are organized into four groups based on the function
type: C.Fn I: Exposure, C.Fn II: Image, C.Fn III: Autofocus/Drive, C.Fn
IV: Operation/Others.
C.Fn I: Exposure
C.Fn-1
Exposure level increments
0: 1/3-stop
1: 1/2-stop
Sets 1/2-stop increments for the shutter speed, aperture, exposure
compensation, AEB, flash exposure compensation, etc. Effective when
you prefer to control the exposure in less fine increments than 1/3-stop
increments.
With setting 1, the exposure level will be displayed in the viewfinder and on
the LCD monitor as shown below.
C.Fn-2
0: Off
1: On
ISO expansion
For the ISO speed, “H” (equivalent to ISO 12800) will be selectable.
Note that if [C.Fn-6: Highlight tone priority] has been set to [1:
Enable], “H” cannot be set.
C.Fn-3
Flash sync. speed in Av (Aperture-priority AE) mode
When you use flash in the aperture-priority AE mode (Av), you can set the
flash sync speed.
0: Auto
The flash sync speed is set automatically within a range of 1/200 sec. to
30 sec. to suit the scene’s brightness. With an external Speedlite, high-
speed sync is also possible.
1: 1/200-1/60 sec. auto
Prevents a slow shutter speed from being set in low-light conditions. It is
effective for preventing subject blur and camera shake. However, while
the subject will be properly exposed with the flash, the background may
come out dark.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
252
3 Custom Function SettingsN
2: 1/200 sec. (fixed)
The flash-sync speed is fixed to 1/200 sec. This more effectively
prevents subject blur and camera shake than with setting 1. However,
the background may come out darker than with setting 1.
When 1 or 2 is set, high-speed sync cannot be used with an external
Speedlite.
C.Fn II: Image
C.Fn-4
0: Off
1: Auto
Long exposure noise reduction
For 1 sec. or longer exposures, noise redction is performed
automatically if noise typical of lonxposres is detected. This [Auto]
setting is effective in most cases.
2: On
Noise reduction is peformell exposures of 1 sec. or longer. The
[On] setting may be efective for noise that cannot be detected or
reduced with the [Autoseting.
With settings 1 and 2, after the picture is taken, the noise reduction
process may take the same amount of time as the exposure. You cannot
take another picture until the noise reduction process is completed.
At ISO 1600 and higher, noise might be more pronounced with setting 2
than with setting 0 or 1.
With setting 1 or 2, if a long exposure is shot with the Live View image
displayed, “BUSY” will be displayed during the noise reduction process.
The Live View display will not appear until the noise reduction is
completed. (You cannot take another picture.)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
253
3 Custom Function SettingsN
C.Fn-5
High ISO speed noise reduction
Reduces the noise generated in the image. Although noise reduction is
applied at all ISO speeds, it is particularly effective at high ISO speeds. At
low ISO speeds, the noise in the shadow areas is further reduced. Change
the setting to suit the noise level.
0: Standard
1: Low
2: Strong
3: Disable
With setting 2, the maximum burst for continuous shooting will greatly
decrease.
If you playback a 1 or 1+73 image with the camera or print an
image directly, the effect of the high ISO speed noise reduction may look
minimal. You can check the noise reduction efect or print noise-reduced
images with Digital Photo Professional (proied software, p.302).
C.Fn-6
Highlight tone ori
0: Disable
1: Enable
Improves the highlight detail. The dynamic range is expanded from the
standard 18% gray to bright highlights. The gradation between the grays
and highlights becomes smoother.
With setting 1, the Auto Lighting Optimizer (p.109) is automatically set to
[Disable] and the setting cannot be changed.
With setting 1, noise may become slightly more pronounced than with
setting 0.
With setting 1, the settable range will be ISO 200 - 6400.
Also, the <A> icon will be displayed on the LCD monitor and in the
viewfinder when highlight tone priority is enabled.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
254
3 Custom Function SettingsN
C.Fn III: Autofocus/Drive
C.Fn-7 AF-assist beam firing
The AF-assist beam can be emitted by the camera’s built-in flash or by an
external, EOS-dedicated Speedlite.
0: Enable
If necessary, the AF-assist beam will be emitted by the built-in flash or
external Speedlite.
1: Disable
The AF-assist beam is not emitted.
2: Enable external flash only
If an external Speedlite is attached, it will emit the AF-assist beam when
necessary. The camera’s built-in flash will not fire the AF-assist beam.
3: IR AF assist beam only
Among external Speedlites, only those whch have an infrared AF-assist
beam will be able to emit the beamThis events any Speedlite which
uses a series of small flashes (like built-n flash) from firing the AF-
assist beam.
With an EX-series Speedlite ped with a LED light, the LED light will
not automatically turon for Assist.
If the external Speedlite’s [AF-assist beam firing] Custom Function is set
to [Disabled], the Speedlite will not emit the AF-assist beam even if the
camera’s C.Fn-7 is set to 0, 2, or 3.
C.Fn-8
Mirror lockup
0: Disable
1: Enable
Prevents mechanical vibrations in the camera caused by the reflex
mirror action which can disturb shooting with super telephoto lenses or
close-up (macro) shooting. See page 122 for the mirror lockup
procedure.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
255
3 Custom Function SettingsN
C.Fn IV: Operation/Others
C.Fn-9
Shutter/AE lock button
0: AF/AE lock
1: AE lock/AF
Convenient when you want to focus and meter separately. Press the <
A>
button to autofocus, and press the shutter button halfway to apply AE lock.
2: AF/AF lock, no AE lock
In the AI Servo AF mode, you can press the <A> button to stop the AF
operation momentarily. This prevents the AF from being thrown off by
any obstacle passing between the camera and subject. The exposure is
set at the moment the picture is taken.
3: AE/AF, no AE lock
This is useful for subjects which keep moving and stopping repeatedly.
In the AI Servo AF mode, you can press the <A> button to start or stop
the AI Servo AF operation. The exposure is t at the moment the
picture is taken. Thus, the optimum fng ad exposure will always
be achieved as you wait for the isivmoment.
C.Fn-10 Assign SET bu
You can assign a frequently-used function to <0>. Press <0> when the
camera is ready to shoot.
0: Normal (disabled)
1: Image quality
Press <
0> to display the image-recording quality setting screen on the
LCD monitor. Select the desired image-recording quality, then press <
0>.
2: Flash exposure compensation
When you press <0>, the flash exposure compensation setting screen
will appear. Set the flash exposure compensation, then press <0>.
3: LCD monitor On/Off
Assigns the same function as the <B> button.
4: Menu display
Press <0> to display the menu screen.
5: ISO speed
The ISO speed setting screen will appear. Press the <U> key or turn
the <6> dial to change the ISO speed. You can also refer to the
viewfinder to set the ISO speed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
256
3 Custom Function SettingsN
C.Fn-11 LCD display when power ON
0: Display on
When the power switch is turned on, the shooting settings will be
displayed (p.47).
1: Previous display status
If you pressed the <B> button and turned off the camera while the
LCD monitor was off, the shooting settings will not be displayed when
you turn on the camera again. This helps to save battery power. The
menu screens and image playback will still be displayed when used.
If you pressed the <B> button to display the shooting settings and
then turn off the camera, the shooting settings will be displayed when
you turn on the camera again.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
257
3 Registering My MenuN
Under the My Menu tab, you can register up to six menu options and
Custom Functions whose settings you change frequently.
Select [My Menu settings].
1
Under the [9] tab, select [My Menu
settings], then press <0>.
Select [Register to My Menu].
2
Select [Register to My Menu], then
press <0>.
Register the desired items.
3
Select the item to be registered, then
press <0>
On the confmation dialog, select
[OK] press <0> to register the
.
can register up to six items.
To return to the screen in step 2,
press the <M> button.
About My Menu settings
Sort
You can change the order of the registered items in My Menu. Select
[Sort] and select the item whose order you want to change. Then
press <0>. With [z] displayed, press the <V> key to change the
order, then press <0>.
Delete item/items and Delete all items
You can delete any of the registered items. [Delete item/items]
deletes one item at a time, and [Delete all items] deletes all items.
Display from My Menu
When [Enable] is set, the [9] tab will be displayed first when you
display the menu screen.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
258
Reference
This chapter provides reference formation for camera
features, system accessories, e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
259
Using a Household Power Outlet
With AC Adapter Kit ACK-E8 (sold separately), you can connect the
camera to a household power outlet and not worry about the remaining
battery level.
Connect the power cord.
1
Connect the power cord as shown in
the illustration.
After using the camera, unplug the
power plug from the power outlet.
Connect the DC Coupler.
2
Connect the cord’s plug to the DC
Coupler.
Insert DC Coupler.
3
n the cover and insert the DC
ler until it locks in place.
Push in the DC cord.
4
Open the DC cord hole cover and
install the cord as shown.
Close the cover.
Do not connect or disconnect the power cord while the camera’s power
switch is set to <1>.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
260
Remote Control Shooting
Remote Controller RC-6 (Sold separately)
This remote controller enables you to take pictures wirelessly up to
about 5 meters/16.4 feet from the camera. You can either shoot
immediately or use a 2-sec. delay.
Remote control sensor
Set the self-timer to <Q> (p.89).
Point the remote controller toward the mera’s remote control
sensor and press the transmit bn.
X The camera will autofocus
X When focus is achieved, t-timer lamp will light and the picture
will be taken.
Camera misoperation may occur near certain types of fluorescent lights.
During wireless remote control shooting, try to keep the camera away from
fluorescent light sources.
Remote Controller RC-1/RC-5 (sold separately) can also be used.
The Remote Controller can also be used for shooting movies (p.159).
Remote Controller RC-5 cannot be used to take still photos in the movie
shooting mode.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
261
Remote Control Shooting
F Remote Switch RS-60E3 (Sold separately)
Remote Switch RS-60E3 (sold separately) comes with an approx.
60 cm/2.0 ft cord. When connected to the camera’s remote control
terminal, Remote Switch RS-60E3 can be used to press the shutter
button halfway and completely.
Using the Eyepiece Cover
When you use the self-timer, bulb, or ote witch and do not look
through the viewfinder, stray light terithe viewfinder can cause the
image to look dark. To prevent the the eyepiece cover (p.25)
attached to the camera strp.
During Live View shooting anmovie shooting, attaching the
eyepiece cover is unnecessary.
Remove the eyecup.
1
Push the bottom of the eyecup to
remove.
Attach the eyepiece cover.
2
Slide the eyepiece cover down into
the eyepiece groove to attach it.
After taking the picture, detach the
eyepiece cover and attach the
eyecup by sliding it down the
eyepiece groove.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
262
External Speedlites
EOS-dedicated, EX-series Speedlites
Basically operates like a built-in flash for easy operation.
When an EX-series Speedlite (sold separately) is attached to the
camera, almost all the autoflash control is done by the camera. In other
words, it is like a high-output flash attached externally in place of the
built-in flash.
For detailed instructions, see the EX-series Speedlite’s instruction
manual. This camera is a Type-A camera that can use all the features
of EX-series Speedlites.
Shoe-mount Speedlites
Macro Lites
With an EX-series Speedlite not compatible with flash function settings
(p.181), only [1 exp. comp] and [E-TTL II meter.] can be set for
[External flash func. setting]. (Certain EX-series Speedlites also
enable [Shutter sync.] to be set.)
If flash exposure compensation is set with the external Speedlite, the
flash exposure compensation icon displayed on the camera’s LCD
monitor will change from y to 0.
If the Speedlite’s Custom Function has the flash metering mode set to
TTL autoflash, the flash will fire at full output only.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
263
External Speedlites
Canon Speedlites other than the EX-series
With an EZ/E/EG/ML/TL-series Speedlite set in TTL or A-TTL
autoflash mode, the flash can be fired at full output only.
Set the camera’s shooting mode to <a> (manual exposure) or
<f> (aperture-priority AE) and adjust the aperture setting before
shooting.
If you are using a Speedlite which has manual flash mode, shoot in
the manual flash mode.
Using Non-Canon Flash Units
Sync Speed
The camera can synchronize with compact, non-Canon flash units at
1/200 sec. or slower shutter speeds. Use a syc speed slower than
1/200 sec.
Be sure to test the flash unit befohano make sure it synchronizes
properly with the camera.
Cautions for Live View shooing
A non-Canon flash will not fire during Live View shooting.
If the camera is used with a flash unit or flash accessory dedicated to
another camera brand, the camera may not operate properly and
malfunction may result.
Do not attach a high-voltage flash unit on the camera’s hot shoe. It might
not fire.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
264
Using Eye-Fi Cards
With a commercially-available Eye-Fi card already set up, you can
automatically transfer captured images to a personal computer or
upload them to an online service via a wireless LAN.
The image transfer is a function of the Eye-Fi card. For instructions on
how to set up and use the Eye-Fi card or to troubleshoot any image
transfer problems, refer to the Eye-Fi card’s instruction manual or
inquire the card’s manufacturer.
The camera is not guaranteed to support Eye-Fi card
functions (including wireless transfer). In case of an issue
with an Eye-Fi card, please check with the card manufacturer.
Also note that approval is required to use Eye-Fi cards in
many countries or regions. Without approval, use of the card
is not permitted. If it is unclear whether the card has been
approved for use in your area, please check with the card
manufacturer.
Insen Eye-Fi card. (p.29)
1
ct [Eye-Fi settings].
2
Under the [5] tab, select [Eye-Fi
settings], then press <0>.
This menu is displayed only when an
Eye-Fi card has been inserted into
the camera.
Enable the Eye-Fi transmission.
3
Press <0>, set [Eye-Fi trans.] to
[Enable], then press <0>.
If you set [Disable], automatic
transmission will not occur even with
the Eye-Fi card inserted
(Transmission status icon I).
Display the connection
4 information.
Select [Connection info.], then press
<0>.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
265
Using Eye-Fi Cards
Check the [Access point SSID:].
5
Check that an access point is
displayed for [Access point SSID:].
You can also check the Eye-Fi card’s
MAC address and firmware version.
Press the <M> button three
times to exit the menu.
Take the picture.
6
X The picture is transferred and the
<H> icon switches from gray (Not
connected) to one of the icons below.
For transferred images, O is
displayed in the shooting information
display (p.26).
Transmission status icon
H (Gray) Not connected : No cotion with access point.
H (Blinking) Connecting : cting with access point.
H (Displayed) Conneced : Conection to access point
established.
H ( ꢂ ) Transferring
: Image transfer to access point in
progress.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
266
Using Eye-Fi Cards
Cautions for Using Eye-Fi Cards
If “J” is displayed, an error occurred while retrieving the card
information. Turn the camera’s power switch off and on again.
Even if [Eye-Fi trans.] is set to [Disable], it may still transmit a signal. In
hospitals, airports, and other places where wireless transmissions are
prohibited, remove the Eye-Fi card from the camera.
If the image transfer does not function, check the Eye-Fi card and
personal computer settings. For details, see the card’s instruction
manual.
Depending on the wireless LAN’s connection conditions, the image
transfer may take longer or it might be interrupted.
Because of the transmission function, the Eye-Fi card may become hot.
The battery power will be consumed faster.
During the image transfer, auto power off will not take effect.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
267
Function Availability Table According to Shooting Modes
o: Set automatically k: User selectable
Basic Zone Creative Zone
A 7 C
: Not selectable
k
k z*1
k
Mode Dial
8
2
3
4
5
k
6 d sf a
k k k k k
o k k k k
k k k k
All recording quality
settings selectable
k k k k k k
o o o o o o
k
k
k
k
Auto / ISO Auto
k
o
ISO
k*2
Manual
speed
Settable maximum
k k k k
ISO speed limit
Automatic setting
Manual selection
D D D D D D D D
Picture
Style
k k k k
k
k
Shoot by ambience selection
Shoot by lighting or scene type
Auto
k k k k k k
k k k k
o o o o o o o o k k k k
k k k k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
Preset
White
balance
Custom
k k k k
Correction /
k k k k
Bracketing
Auto Lighting Optimizer
o o o o o o k k k k
k k k k k k k k k k
k k k k
k
k
Lens peripheral illumination
correction
Long exposure noise
reduction
High ISO speed noise reduction
o o o o o o o o k k k k
k k k k
Highlight tone priority
k
sRGB
o o o o o o o o k k k k
k k k k
Color
space
Adobe RGB
One-Shot AF
AI Servo AF
o o o
o k k k k
k k k k
k k k k
d
c
f*3
o
AI Focus AF
AF point selection
AF-assist beam
Manual (MF)
o o o
Focusing
o o o o o o o o k k k k
f
4
o
o o
o
*
o k k k k
k k k k k k k k k k k k
k
*1 : The z icon indicates still photo shooting in the movie shooting mode.
*2 : For manual exposures only.
*3 : If used during movie shooting, it will switch to <d>.
*4 : If the AF mode is <f> during Live View shooting, the external Speedlite
will emit the AF-assist beam when necessary.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
268
Function Availability Table According to Shooting Modes
Basic Zone
A 7 C
o o o o o o
Creative Zone
k
Mode Dial
8
2
3
4
5
6 d sf a
o k k
k z*1
Evaluative
o
k k
k
k
Metering
Metering mode
mode
k k k k
k
selection
Program shift
Exposure
k k k
k k k k
k k k
k k k k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k*6
k*6
o
compensation
Exposure AEB
AE lock
Depth-of-field
preview
Single shooting
Continuous shooting
j(10 sec.)
k k k
k k
k k
k k k
k k
k k k k
k
k
Drive
k k k k k k
(Continuous)
k k k k
k k k
k k
l(2 sec.)
k k k k
q
k k k
k k
k
o
Fires automatically
Flash on
o
k
k
o
o
k k k k
k k k k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
Flash off
o k
k k
o
o
Built-in
flash
Red-eye reduction
k
k
k k k
k k
FE lock
Flash exposure
compensation
k k k k
k k k k
k k k k
k k k k
k k k k
Wireless control
Function setting
Custom Function
setting
External
flash
Live View shooting
Aspect ratio*5
Quick Control
Feature guide
k k k k k k
k k k
k k
k
k k k k
k k k k k k
k k k k k k
k k k
k
k
k
k
k k
k k
k k k
*5 : Settable only for Live View shooting.
*6 : Settable only for auto exposures.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
269
3 Menu Settings
For Viewfinder Shooting and Live View Shooting
1 Shooting 1 (Red)
Page
76
73 / 83 / 74 / 84 / 7a / 8a / b / c /
1+73 / 1
Quality
Beep
Enable / Disable
166
166
166
110
91
Release shutter
without card
Enable / Disable
Image review
Off / 2 sec. / 4 sec. / 8 sec. / Hold
Enable / Disable
Peripheral illumination
correction
Red-eye reduction
Disable / Enable
Flash firing / E-TTL II metering mode /
Built-in flash function setting / External flash
function setting / External fash C.Fn setting /
Clear external flash C.Fn tting
Flash control
180
2 Shooting 2 (Red)
1/3-stop or p increments, ±5 stops
(AE: ±2 sto
Exposure
compensation/AEB
105
109
Auto Lighting Optimizer Disabe / Lw / Standard / Strong
q Evaluative metering / w Partial metering /
r Spot metering / e Center-weighted
average metering
Metering mode
102
Custom White Balance Manual setting of white balance
117
WB correction: White balance correction
WB Shift/BKT
119
120
BKT setting: White balance bracketing
Color space
Picture Style
sRGB / Adobe RGB
121
DAuto / PStandard / QPortrait /
RLandscape / SNeutral / UFaithful /
VMonochrome / WUser Def. 1, 2, 3
81
112
115
The [2] Shooting 2, [y] Shooting 3, [7] Set-up 3, and [9] My Menu
screens (tabs) are not displayed in Basic Zone modes.
The [z] Shooting 4 tab is displayed in Basic Zone modes as the [2]
Shooting 2 tab.
Shaded menu options are not displayed in Basic Zone modes.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
270
3 Menu Settings
yShooting 3 (Red)
Page
Dust Delete Data
Obtains data to be used to erase dust spots
185
80
Max.: 400 / Max.: 800 / Max.: 1600 /
Max.: 3200 / Max.: 6400
ISO Auto
zShooting 4 (Red)
Live View shooting
AF mode
Enable / Disable
125
131
129
129
Live mode / uLive mode / Quick mode
Off / Grid 1l/ Grid 2m
3:2 / 4:3 / 16:9 / 1:1
Grid display
Aspect ratio
4 sec. / 16 sec. / 30 sec. / 1 min. / 10 min. /
30 min.
Metering timer
130
3 Playback 1 (Blue)
Select images / All imges in folder / Unprotect
all images in folder / Aimages on card /
Unprotect all es on ard
Protect images
222
Rotate
Rotate al iages
205
224
245
230
233
Select ase images / All images in folder /
ll images on card
Erase images
Print order
Creative filters
Resize
Specify images to be printed (DPOF)
Grainy B/W / Soft focus / Fish-eye effect /
Toy camera effect / Miniature effect
Downsize the image’s pixel count
4 Playback 2 (Blue)
Histogram
Brightness / RGB
228
203
1 image / 10 images / 100 images / Date /
Folder / Movies / Stills / Rating
Image jump w/6
Playback description / Display time / Repeat /
Transition effect / Background music
Slide show
215
Rating
[OFF] / l / m / n / o / p
Disable / Enable
206
213
219
Bass boost
Control over HDMI
Disable / Enable
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
271
3 Menu Settings
5 Set-up 1 (Yellow)
Page
167
30 sec. / 1 min. / 2 min. / 4 min. / 8 min. /
15 min. / Off
Auto power off
Auto rotate
Format
OnPD / OnD / Off
174
45
Initialize and erase data on the card
Continuous / Auto reset / Manual reset
Create and select a folder
File numbering
Select folder
Screen color
170
168
179
Select the shooting settings screen color
Eye-Fi transmission: Disable / Enable
Connection information
Eye-Fi settings*
265
* Displayed only when an Eye-Fi card is used.
6 Set-up 2 (Yellow)
LCD brightness
Seven brightness levels provided
167
179
LCD off/on button
Shutter button / Shutter/DSP / Remains on
Set the date (yeanth, ay) and time (hour,
min., sec.)
Date/Time
34
LanguageK
Select the ce lnguage
NTC / PAL
35
Video system
221
Auto leang: Enable / Disable
Clean now
184
Sensor cleaning
Clean manually
187
48
Feature guide
Enable / Disable
7 Set-up 3 (Yellow)
Custom Functions (C.Fn) Customize camera functions as desired
250
172
Display copyright information / Enter author’s
Copyright information name / Enter copyright details / Delete
copyright information
Clear all camera settings / Clear all Custom
Func. (C.Fn)
Clear settings
176
-
Firmware Ver.
For updating the firmware
9 My Menu (Green)
My Menu settings
Register frequently-used menu items and
Custom Functions
258
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
272
3 Menu Settings
kFor Movie Shooting
nMovie 1 (Red)
Page
157
Movie exposure
AF mode
Auto / Manual
Live mode / uLive mode / Quick mode
157
AF with shutter button
during k
Disable / Enable
157
AF/AE lock / AE lock/AF /
AF/AF lock, no AE lock /
AE/AF, no AE lock
kShutter/AE lock
button
158
Remote control
Disable / Enable
159
159
kHighlight tone
priority
Disable / Enable
oMovie 2 (Red)
Movie recordisize:
1920x1080 (5 / 4) /
1280x8 7) /
640x4/ 5)
150
Movie recording size
Digital zom: OFF / 3x - 10x
152
160
Sound recording: Auto / Manual / Disable
Recording level
Sound recording
Wind filter: Disable / Enable
4 sec. / 16 sec. / 30 sec. / 1 min. / 10 min. /
30 min.
Metering timer
Grid display
161
161
153
Off / Grid 1l/ Grid 2m
Disable / 2 sec. movie / 4 sec. movie /
8 sec. movie
Video snapshot
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
273
3 Menu Settings
Z Movie 3 (Red)
Page
162
Exposure
compensation
1/3-stop increments, ±5 stops
Auto Lighting
Optimizer
Disable / Low / Standard / Strong
162
162
Custom White Balance Manual setting of white balance
DAuto / PStandard / QPortrait /
Picture Style
RLandscape / SNeutral / UFaithful /
VMonochrome / WUser Def. 1, 2, 3
162
1 Shooting 1 (Red)
73 / 83 / 74 / 84 / 7a / 8a / b / c /
1+73 / 1
Quality
Beep
76
Enable / Disable
166
166
166
110
Release shutter
without card
Enable / Disable
Image review
Off / 2 sec. / 4 sesec. Hold
Enable /
Peripheral illumination
correction
3 Playback 1 (Blue)
Select images / All images in folder / Unprotect
all images in folder / All images on card /
Unprotect all images on card
Protect images
222
Rotate
Rotate vertical images
205
224
245
230
233
Select and erase images / All images in folder /
All images on card
Erase images
Print order
Creative filters
Resize
Specify images to be printed (DPOF)
Grainy B/W / Soft focus / Fish-eye effect /
Toy camera effect / Miniature effect
Downsize the image’s pixel count
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
274
3 Menu Settings
4 Playback 2 (Blue)
Page
228
Histogram
Brightness / RGB
1 image / 10 images / 100 images / Date /
Folder / Movies / Stills / Rating
203
215
Image jump w/6
Playback description / Display time / Repeat /
Transition effect / Background music
Slide show
Rating
[OFF] / l / m / n / o / p
Disable / Enable
206
213
219
Bass boost
Control over HDMI
Disable / Enable
5 Set-up 1 (Yellow)
30 sec. / 1 min. / 2 min. / 4 min. / 8 min. /
15 min. / Off
Auto power off
167
Auto rotate
Format
OnPD / OnD / Off
174
45
Initialize and erase daon the card
Continuous / rese/ Manual reset
Create selt a folder
File numbering
Select folder
170
168
Eye-Fi ission: Disable / Enable
Connectioinformation
Eye-Fi settings*
265
* Displayed only when an Ey-Fcard is used.
6 Set-up 2 (Yellow)
LCD brightness
Seven brightness levels provided
167
34
Set the date (year, month, day) and time (hour,
min., sec.)
Date/Time
LanguageK
Video system
Feature guide
Select the interface language
NTSC / PAL
35
221
48
Enable / Disable
The menu tabs and options displayed will differ for viewfinder shooting,
Live View shooting, and movie shooting.
The [n] Movie 1, [o] Movie 2, and [Z] Movie 3 screens (tabs)
are displayed only in the movie shooting mode.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
275
System Map
ST-E2
270EX II
320EX
430EX II 580EX II Macro Ring Lite Macro Twin Lite
MR-14EX
MT-24EX
Eyepiece Extender
EP-EX15ll
Bundled
Accessories
Rubber Frame Ef
Eyecup Ef
E-series Dioptric
Adjustment Lenses
Wide Strap
EW-100DB lll
Angle Finder C
Semi Hard Case
EH19-L
AC Adapter Kit
ACK-E8
Battery Pack
LP-E8
Battery Charger
LC-E8 or LC-E8E
Hand Strap E2
DC Coupler
DR-E8
Compact Power
Adapter
CA-PS700
Battery Magazine
BGM-E8L for two
LP-E8 battery packs
Battery Magazine
BGM-E8A for
Battery Grip
BG-E8
size-AA/LR6 batteries
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
276
System Map
Remote
Controller Remote Switch
RC-6
RS-60E3
EF lenses
EF-S lenses
External microphone
HDMI Cable
HTC-100 (2.9 m/9.5 ft.)
TV/Video
Stereo AV Cable
AVC-DC400ST
(1.3 m/4.3 ft.)
PictBridge-compatible printer
EOS DIGITAL Software Instruction
Solution Disk
Manual
Interface Cable
(1.3 m/4.3 ft.)
Interface Cable IFC-200U/500U
(1.9 m/6.2 ft.) / (4.7 m/15.4 ft.)
Computer
USB port
Windows 7
Windows Vista
Windows XP
Mac OS X
SD/SDHC/SDXC
memory card
Card reader
Card slot
* The length of all cables is approx. **m/**ft
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
277
Troubleshooting Guide
If a problem occurs with the camera, first refer to this Troubleshooting
Guide. If this Troubleshooting Guide does not resolve the problem,
contact your dealer or nearest Canon Service Center.
Power-Related Problems
The battery pack does not recharge.
Do not recharge any battery pack other than a genuine Canon Battery
Pack LP-E8.
The battery charger’s lamp blinks.
If there is a problem with the battery charger, the protective circuit will
stop the charging operation and the charge lamp will blink in orange. If
this happens, disconnect the charger’s power plug from the power
outlet and remove the battery pack. Attach he battery pack to the
charger again and wait a while befonnecting the charger to a
power outlet again.
The camera does not operatn when the power switch is
set to <1>.
The battery is not properly installed in the camera (p.28).
Make sure the battery compartment cover is closed (p.28).
Make sure the card slot cover is closed (p.29).
Recharge the battery (p.26).
Press the <B> button (p.47).
The access lamp still blinks even when the power switch is
set to <2>.
If the power is turned off while an image is being recorded to the card,
the access lamp will still continue to light/blink for a few seconds.
When the image recording is completed, the power will turn off
automatically.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
278
Troubleshooting Guide
The battery becomes exhausted quickly.
Use a fully-charged battery pack (p.26).
The rechargeable battery pack performance will degrade over
repeated use. Purchase a new one.
If you use Live View shooting or shoot movies for a prolonged period
(p.123, 141), the number of possible shots will decrease.
If you hold down the shutter button for a long time or often use only the
AF without taking pictures, the number of possible shots will decrease.
If you often use the LCD monitor, the number of possible shots will
decrease.
If you use the lens Image Stabilizer, the number of possible shots will
decrease.
The camera turns off by itself.
Auto power off is in effect. If yonot want auto power off to take
effect, set [5 Auto pow] to Off] (p.167).
Even if [5 Auto power obeen set to [Off], the LCD monitor will
still turn off after thcamera is idle for 30 min. Press the <B>
button to turn on the LCD monitor.
Shooting-Related Problems
No images can be shot nor recorded.
The card is not properly inserted (p.29).
If the card is full, replace the card or delete unnecessary images to
make room (p.29, 224).
If you try to focus in the One-Shot AF mode while the focus
confirmation light <o> in the viewfinder blinks, a picture cannot be
taken. Press the shutter button halfway again to focus, or focus
manually (p.40, 87).
Slide the card’s write-protect switch to the Write/Erase setting (p.29).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
279
Troubleshooting Guide
The card cannot be used.
If a card error message is displayed, see page 30 or 287.
The file numbering does not start from 0001.
If the card already contains recorded images, the image number might
not start from 0001 (p.170).
The image is out of focus.
Set the lens focus mode switch to <AF> (p.36).
To prevent camera shake, press the shutter button gently (p.39, 40).
If the lens has an Image Stabilizer, set the IS switch to <1>.
In low light, the shutter speed may become slow. Use a faster shutter
speed (p.94), set a higher ISO speed (p79use flash (p.90), or use a
tripod.
Horizontal stripes appear, oexposure or color tone look
strange.
Horizontal stripes or irregular exposures can be caused by fluorescent
light, LED bulbs, or other artificial lighting during viewfinder or Live
View shooting. Also, the exposure or color tone might not come out
right. A slow shutter speed may solve the problem.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
280
Troubleshooting Guide
The maximum burst during continuous shooting is lower.
Under [7 Custom Functions (C.Fn)], set [5: High ISO speed noise
reduction] to [Standard], [Low], or [Disable]. If it is set to [Strong],
the maximum burst during continuous shooting will greatly decrease
(p.254).
If you shoot something that has fine detail (field of grass, etc.), the file
size will be larger and the actual maximum burst might be lower than
the number mentioned on page 76.
ISO 100 cannot be set.
Under [7 Custom Functions (C.Fn)], if [6: Highlight tone priority]
is set to [1: Enable], ISO 100 cannot be set. If [0: Disable] is set, ISO
100 can be set (p.254). This also applies to movie shooting (p.159).
The Auto Lighting Optimizer cot bset.
Under [7 Custom Func(CFn)], if [6: Highlight tone priority]
is set to [1: Enable, the Aghting Optimizer cannot be set. If [0:
Disable] is set, the Auto Lighting Optimizer can be set (p.254). This
also applies to movie shooting (p.162).
ISO speed [H] (ISO 12800) cannot be set.
Under [7 Custom Functions (C.Fn)], if [6: Highlight tone priority]
is set to [1: Enable], the [H] ISO speed cannot be selected even when
[2: ISO expansion] has been set to [1: On]. If [0: Disable] is set, [H]
can be set (p.252).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
281
Troubleshooting Guide
When I use the <f> mode with flash, the shutter speed
becomes slow.
If you shoot at night when the background is dark, the shutter speed
becomes slow automatically (slow-sync shooting) so that both the
subject and background are properly exposed. If you do not want a
slow shutter speed to be set, set [3: Flash sync. speed in Av mode]
in [7 Custom Functions (C.Fn)] to 1 or 2 (p.252).
The built-in flash pops up by itself.
In the A, 2, 4, and 6 modes, the built-in flash will pop-up
automatically when flash is necessary.
The built-in flash does not fire.
If you shoot continuously with the bin flah at short intervals, the
flash might stop operating to protece flash unit.
I cannot set flash exposure ensation with [External
flash func. setting].
If flash exposure compensation has been set on an external Speedlite,
[Flash exp. comp] (p.182) cannot be set in the [External flash func.
setting] screen. Also, if you set flash exposure compensation with the
camera and then set flash exposure compensation with the external
Speedlite, the Speedlite’s flash exposure compensation setting will
override the camera’s. When the Speedlite’s flash exposure
compensation is canceled (set to 0), flash exposure compensation can
be set with the camera.
High-speed sync cannot be set in the <f> mode.
Under [7 Custom Functions (C.Fn)], set [3: Flash sync. speed in
Av mode] to [0: Auto] (p.252).
The camera makes a noise when it is shaken.
The built-in flash’s pop-up mechanism moves slightly. This is normal.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
282
Troubleshooting Guide
The shutter makes two shooting sounds during Live View
shooting.
If you use flash, the shutter will make two sounds each time you shoot
(p.125).
During Live View and movie shooting, a white <s> or red
<E> icon is displayed.
It indicates that the camera’s internal temperature is high. If the white
<s> icon is displayed, the still photo’s image quality might
deteriorate. If the red <E> icon is displayed, it indicates that the Live
View or movie shooting will soon be terminated automatically (p.139,
163).
Movie shooting terminates by ielf.
If the card’s writing speed lowmovie shooting may stop
automatically. Use an SD Class 6 “
” or faster card. To
find out the card’s ead/writpeed, see the card manufacturer’s Web
site, etc.
The movie shooting will be terminated automatically if the file size
reaches 4 GB or if the movie length reaches 29 min. 59 sec.
The image flickers or horizontal stripes appear during movie
shooting.
Flickering, horizontal stripes (noise), or irregular exposures can be
caused by fluorescent light, LED bulbs, or other artificial lighting during
movie shooting. Also, changes in the exposure (brightness) or color
tone might also be recorded. With manual exposures, a slow shutter
speed may solve the problem.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
283
Troubleshooting Guide
Playback Problems
The LCD monitor does not display a clear image.
If the LCD monitor is dirty, use a soft cloth to clean it.
In low or high temperatures, the LCD monitor display may seem slow
or might look black. It will return to normal at room temperature.
Part of the image blinks in black.
It is the highlight alert (p.228). Overexposed highlight areas with a loss
of highlight detail will blink.
The image cannot be erased.
If the image has been protected, it cannot e erased (p.222).
The movie cannot play.
Movies edited with a personaputer using the provided
ZoomBrowser EX/ImaeBrowser (p.302) or other software cannot be
played with the camera. However, video snapshot albums edited with
ZoomBrowser EX/ImageBrowser can be played on the camera.
When the movie is played, camera operation noise can be
heard.
If you operate the camera’s dials or lens during movie shooting, the
operation noise will also be recorded. Use an external microphone
(commercially available) (p.160).
The movie has still moments.
During autoexposure movie shooting, if there is a drastic change in the
exposure level, the recording will stop momentarily until the brightness
stabilizes. If this happens, use manual exposure (p.144).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
284
Troubleshooting Guide
The subject looks distorted during movie shooting.
If you move the camera to the left or right quickly (high-speed panning)
or shoot a moving subject, the image may look distorted.
No image appears on the TV screen.
Make sure the AV cable or HDMI cable’s plug is inserted all the way in
(p.218, 221).
Set the video OUT system (NTSC/PAL) to the same video system as
the TV set (p.221).
My card reader does not recognize the card.
Depending on the card reader and computer OS used, SDXC cards
might not be correctly recognized. In suh a case, connect your
camera to the computer with thovideinterface cable, then
transfer the images to youomer using EOS Utility (provided
software, p.302).
Display Problems
The menu screen shows few tabs and options.
In Basic Zone modes and in movie shooting mode, certain tabs and
menu options are not displayed. Set the shooting mode to a Creative
Zone mode (p.43).
The file name’s first character is an underscore (“_MG_”).
Set the color space to sRGB. If Adobe RGB is set, the first character
will be an underscore (p.121).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
285
Troubleshooting Guide
The file name starts with “MVI_”.
It is a movie file (p.171).
The shooting date and time displayed is incorrect.
The correct date and time has not been set (p.34).
The date and time is not in the picture.
The shooting date and time does not appear in the picture. The date
and time is instead recorded in the image data as shooting
information. When printing, you can imprint the date and time in the
picture by using the date and time recorded in the shooting information
(p.241).
[###] is displayed.
If the card has recorded a nur omages greater than the camera
can display, [###] will be disp(p.207).
[Eye-Fi settings] does not ppear.
[Eye-Fi settings] will appear only when an Eye-Fi card is inserted into
the camera. If the Eye-Fi card has a write-protect tab set to the LOCK
position, you will not be able to check the card’s connection status or
disable Eye-Fi card transmission (p.265).
Printing-Related Problems
There are fewer printing effects than listed in the instruction
manual.
What is displayed on the screen differs depending on the printer. This
instruction manual lists all the printing effects available (p.240).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
286
Error Codes
If there is a problem with the camera, an
error message will appear. Follow the on-
screen instructions.
Error No.
Countermeasures
No.
Error Message & Solution
Communications between the camera and lens is faulty. Clean the
lens contacts.
01
ÎClean the electrical contacts on the camera and lens and use a
Canon lens (p.15, 18).
Card cannot be accessed. ert/cange card or format card
with camera.
02
ÎRemove and insert td again, replace the card, or format the
card (p.29, 4).
Cannot save images because card is full. Replace card.
04
05
06
ÎReplace the card, erase unnecessary images, or format the card
(p.29, 224, 45).
The built-in flash could not be raised. Turn the camera off and on
again.
ÎOperate the power switch (p.32).
Sensor cleaning is not possible. Turn the camera off and on
again.
ÎOperate the power switch (p.32).
Shooting is not possible due to an error. Turn the camera off and
on again or re-install the battery.
10, 20,
30, 40,
50, 60,
70, 80
ÎOperate the power switch, remove and install the battery pack
again, or use a Canon lens (p.32, 28).
* If the error still persists, write down the error No. and contact your nearest
Canon Service Center.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
287
Specifications
• Type
Type:
Digital, single-lens reflex, AF/AE camera with built-in flash
Recording media:
Image sensor size:
Compatible lenses:
SD memory card, SDHC memory card, SDXC memory card
Approx. 22.3 x 14.9 mm
Canon EF lenses (including EF-S lenses)
(35mm-equivalent focal length is approx. 1.6 times the
lens focal length)
Lens mount:
Canon EF mount
• Image Sensor
Type:
CMOS sensor
Effective pixels:
Aspect ratio:
Approx. 18.00 megapixels
3:2
Dust delete feature:
Auto, Manual, Dust Delete Data appending
• Recording System
Recording format:
Image type:
Design rule for Camera File System 2.0
JPEG, RAW (14-bit Canon iginal)
RAW+JPEG Large ltaneous recording possible
Recorded pixels:
L (Large)
: ppro17.90 megapixels (5184 x 3456)
M (Medium) ox. 8.00 megapixels (3456 x 2304)
S1 (Small 1) : ox. 4.50 megapixels (2592 x 1728)
S2 (Small 2: Approx. 2.50 megapixels (1920 x 1280)
S3 (Small 3) : Approx. 350,000 pixels (720 x 480)
RAW
: Approx. 17.90 megapixels (5184 x 3456)
• Image Processing During Shooting
Picture Style:
Auto, Standard, Portrait, Landscape, Neutral, Faithful,
Monochrome, User Def. 1 - 3
Basic+:
White balance:
Shoot by ambience selection, Shoot by lighting or scene type
Auto, Preset (Daylight, Shade, Cloudy, Tungsten light,
White fluorescent light, Flash), Custom
White balance correction and white balance bracketing
features provided
*
Flash color temperature information communication provided
Noise reduction:
Automatic image
Applicable to long exposures and high ISO speed shots
brightness correction: Auto Lighting Optimizer
Highlight tone priority: Provided
Lens peripheral
illumination correction: Provided
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
288
Specifications
• Viewfinder
Type:
Eye-level pentamirror
Coverage:
Magnification:
Eye point:
Vertical/Horizontal approx. 95% (with Eye point approx. 19 mm)
Approx. 0.85x (-1 m-1 with 50mm lens at infinity)
Approx. 19 mm (From eyepiece lens center at -1 m-1
)
Built-in dioptric adjustment: Approx. -3.0 - +1.0 m-1 (dpt)
Focusing screen:
Mirror:
Fixed, Precision Matte
Quick-return type
Depth-of-field preview: Provided
• Autofocus
Type:
TTL secondary image-registration, phase detection
AF points:
9 AF points
Metering range:
Focus modes:
EV -0.5 - 18 (at 23°C/73°F, ISO 100)
One-Shot AF, AI Servo AF, AI Focus AF, Manual focusing
(MF)
AF-assist beam:
Small series of flashes ed by built-in flash
• Exposure Control
Metering modes:
63-zone TTL fulerture metering
• Evaluateng (linked to all AF points)
• artial mg (approx. 9% of viewfinder at center)
• pot metering (approx. 4% of viewfinder at center)
• Cente-weighted average metering
Metering range:
EV 1 - 20 (at 23°C/73°F with EF50mm f/1.4 USM lens,
ISO 100)
Exposure control:
Program AE (Scene Intelligent Auto, Flash Off, Creative
Auto, Portrait, Landscape, Close-up, Sports, Night
Portrait, Program), shutter-priority AE, aperture-priority
AE, manual exposure, automatic depth-of-field AE
Basic Zone modes: ISO 100 - 3200 set automatically
Creative Zone modes : ISO 100 - 6400 set manually
(whole-stop increments), ISO 100 - 6400 set
automatically, maximum ISO speed settable for ISO
Auto, or ISO expansion to “H” (equivalent to ISO 12800)
Manual: ±5 stops in 1/3- or 1/2-stop increments
ISO speed:
(Recommended
exposure index)
Exposure compensation
:
AEB:
±2 stops in 1/3- or 1/2-stop increments (Can be
combined with manual exposure compensation)
Applied in One-Shot AF mode with evaluative
metering when focus is achieved
AE lock:
Auto:
Manual: By AE lock button
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
289
Specifications
• Shutter
Type:
Shutter speeds:
Electronically-controlled, focal-plane shutter
1/4000 sec. to 1/60 sec. (Scene Intelligent Auto mode),
X-sync at 1/200 sec.
1/4000 sec. to 30 sec., bulb (Total shutter speed range.
Available range varies by shooting mode.)
• Flash
Built-in flash:
Retractable, auto pop-up flash
Guide No.: Approx. 13/43 (ISO 100, in meters/feet)
Flash coverage: Approx. 17mm lens angle of view
Recycling time approx. 3 sec.
Wireless master unit function provided
EX-series Speedlite (Flash functions settable with the
camera)
External flash:
Flash metering:
E-TTL II autoflash
Flash exposure compensation: ±2 stops in 1/3- or 1/2-stop ncrements
FE lock:
PC terminal:
Provided
None
• Drive System
Drive mode:
Singlshootintinuous shooting, self-timer with 10-sec.
or 2-sc. dely and 10-sec. delay with continuous shooting
Continuous shooting speed: Max. approx. 3.7 shots/sec.
Max. burst:
JPEG Large/Fine: Approx. 34 shots
RAW: Approx. 6 shots
RAW+JPEG Large/Fine: Approx. 3 shots
* Figures are based on Canon’s testing standards (ISO
100 and “Standard” Picture Style) using a 4GB card.
• Live View Shooting
Aspect ratio settings:
Focusing:
3:2, 4:3, 16:9, 1:1
Live mode, Face detection Live mode (Contrast
detection), Quick mode (Phase-difference detection)
Manual focusing (Approx. 5x / 10x magnification
possible)
Metering modes:
Metering range:
Evaluative metering with the image sensor
EV 0 - 20 (at 23°C/73°F with EF50mm f/1.4 USM lens,
ISO 100)
Grid display:
Two types
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
290
Specifications
• Movie Shooting
Movie compression:
MPEG-4 AVC/H.264
Variable (average) bit rate
Audio recording format: Linear PCM
Recording format:
Recording size
and frame rate:
MOV
1920x1080 (Full HD) : 30p/25p/24p
1280x720 (HD)
640x480 (SD)
: 60p/50p
: 30p/25p
* 30p: 29.97 fps, 25p: 25.00 fps, 24p: 23.976 fps, 60p:
59.94 fps, 50p: 50.00 fps
File size:
1920x1080 (30p/25p/24p) : Approx. 330 MB/min.
1280x720 (60p/50p)
640x480 (30p/25p)
: Approx. 330 MB/min.
: Approx. 82.5 MB/min.
Focusing:
Metering modes:
Same as focusing with Live View shooting
Center-weighted average and evaluative metering with
the image sensor
* Automaticallby thfocusing mode
EV 0 - 20 (3°C°F with EF50mm f/1.4 USM lens, ISO 100)
Program mvies and manual exposure
Metering range:
Exposure control:
Exposure compensation: ±stops istop increments (Still photos: ±5 stops)
ISO speed:
(Recommended
exposure index)
Wh autoexposure shooting: Automatically set within
ISO 100 - 6400
With manual exposure, ISO 100 - 6400 set automatically/
manually
Digital zoom:
Approx. 3x - 10x
Video snapshots:
Sound recording:
Settable to 2 sec./4 sec./8 sec.
Built-in monaural microphone
External stereo microphone terminal provided
Sound recording level adjustable, wind filter provided
Two types
Grid display:
• LCD Monitor
Type:
TFT color liquid-crystal monitor
Monitor size and dots: Wide, 3.0-in. (3:2) with approx. 1.04 million dots
Angle adjustment: Possible
Brightness adjustment: Manual (7 levels)
Interface languages:
Feature guide:
25
Displayable
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
291
Specifications
• Playback
Image display formats: Single image, Single image + Info (Basic info, shooting
info, histogram), 4-image index, 9-image index, image
rotate possible
Zoom magnification:
Approx. 1.5x - 10x
Image browsing methods: Single image, jump by 10 or 100 images, by shooting
date, by folder, by movies, by stills, by rating
Highlight alert:
Overexposed highlights blink
Movie playback:
Enabled (LCD monitor, video/audio OUT, HDMI OUT)
Built-in speaker
Slide show:
All images, by date, by folder, movies, stills, or by rating
Five transition effects selectable
Selectable for slide shows and movie playback
Provided
Background music:
Bass boost:
• Post-Processing of Images
Creative filters:
Grainy B/W, Soft focus, Fis-eye effect, Toy camera
effect, Miniature effe
Possible
Resize:
• Direct Printing
Compatible printers:
Printable images:
Print ordering:
PictBidge-coble printers
JPEG and RAW images
DPOF Version 1.1 compatible
• Custom Functions
Custom Functions:
11
My Menu registration: Possible
Copyright information: Entry and inclusion possible
• Interface
Audio/video OUT/
Digital terminal:
Analog video (Compatible with NTSC/PAL)/stereo audio output
For personal computer communication and direct printing
(Hi-Speed USB equivalent)
HDMI mini OUT terminal: Type C (Auto switching of resolution), CEC-compatible
External microphone
IN terminal:
3.5mm dia. stereo mini-jack
Remote control terminal: For Remote Switch RS-60E3
Wireless remote control: Remote Controller RC-6
Eye-Fi card:
Compatible
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
292
Specifications
• Power
Battery:
Battery Pack LP-E8 (Quantity 1)
* AC power can be supplied via AC Adapter Kit ACK-E8
* With Battery Grip BG-E8 attached, size-AA/LR6
batteries can be used
Battery life:
With viewfinder shooting:
(Based on CIPA
testing standards)
Approx. 440 shots at 23°C/73°F, approx. 400 shots at 0°C/32°F
With Live View shooting:
Approx. 180 shots at 23°C/73°F, approx. 150 shots at 0°C/32°F
Approx. 1 hr. 40 min. at 23°C/73°F
Movie shooting time
Approx. 1 hr. 20 min. at 0°C/32°F
(With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E8)
• Dimensions and Weight
Dimensions (W x H x D): Approx. 133.1 x 99.5 x 79.7 mm / 5.2 x 3.9 x 3.1 in.
Weight:
Approx. 570 g / 20.1 oz. (CIPA Guidelines),
Approx. 515 g / 18.2 oz(Body only)
• Operation Environment
Working temperature range: 0°C - 40°32°104°F
Working humidity:
85% or
• Battery Pack LP-E8
Type:
Rated voltage:
Battery capacity:
Rehareable lithium-ion battery
7.2 V DC
1120 mAh
Working temperature range: During charging: 6°C - 40°C / 43°F - 104°F
During shooting: 0°C - 40°C / 32°F - 104°F
Working humidity:
Dimensions (W x H x D): Approx. 37.1 x 15.4 x 55.2 mm / 1.5 x 0.6 x 2.2 in.
Weight: Approx. 52 g / 1.8 oz.
85% or less
• Battery Charger LC-E8
Compatible battery:
Recharging time:
Rated input:
Battery Pack LP-E8
Approx. 2 hours (at 23°C/73°F)
100 - 240 V AC (50/60 Hz)
8.4 V DC / 720 mA
Rated output:
Working temperature range: 6°C - 40°C / 43°F - 104°F
Working humidity: 85% or less
Dimensions (W x H x D): Approx. 69 x 28 x 87.5 mm / 2.7 x 1.1 x 3.4 in.
Weight: Approx. 82 g / 2.9 oz.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
293
Specifications
• Battery Charger LC-E8E
Compatible battery:
Recharging time:
Rated input:
Battery Pack LP-E8
Approx. 2 hours (at 23°C/73°F)
100 - 240 V AC (50/60 Hz)
8.4 V DC / 720 mA
Rated output:
Working temperature range: 6°C - 40°C / 43°F - 104°F
Working humidity: 85% or less
Dimensions (W x H x D): Approx. 69 x 28 x 87.5 mm / 2.7 x 1.1 x 3.4 in.
Weight: Approx. 82 g / 2.9 oz.
• EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS II
Angle of view:
Diagonal extent: 74°20’ - 27°50’
Horizontal extent: 64°30’ - 23°20’
Vertical extent: 45°30’ - 15°40’
11 elements in 9 groups
f/22 - 36
Lens construction:
Minimum aperture:
Closest focusing distance: 0.25 m / 0.82 ft. (From image sensor plane)
Max. magnification:
Field of view:
0.34x (at 55 mm)
207 x 134 - 67 x 45 / 8.1 5.3 - 2.6 x 1.8 in. (at 0.25
m / 0.82 ft.)
Lens shift ty
58 m
Image Stabilizer:
Filter size:
Lens cap:
E-58
Max. diameter x length: Approx. 68.5 x 70 mm / 2.7 x 2.8 in.
Weight:
Hood:
Case:
Approx. 200 g / 7.1 oz.
EW-60C (sold separately)
LP814 (sold separately)
• EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 III
Angle of view:
Diagonal extent: 74°20’ - 27°50’
Horizontal extent: 64°30’ - 23°20’
Vertical extent: 45°30’ - 15°40’
11 elements in 9 groups
f/22 - 36
Lens construction:
Minimum aperture:
Closest focusing distance: 0.25 m / 0.82 ft. (From image sensor plane)
Max. magnification:
Field of view:
0.34x (at 55mm)
207 x 134 - 67 x 45 mm / 8.1 x 5.3 - 2.6 x 1.8 in. (at
0.25 m / 0.82 ft.)
58 mm
E-58
Filter size:
Lens cap:
Max. diameter x length: Approx. 68.5 x 70.0 mm / 2.7 x 2.8 in.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
294
Specifications
Weight:
Hood:
Case:
Approx. 195 g / 6.9 oz.
EW-60C (sold separately)
LP814 (sold separately)
• EF-S18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS
Angle of view:
Diagonal extent: 74°20’ - 11°30’
Horizontal extent: 64°30’ - 9°30’
Vertical extent: 45°30’ - 6°20’
16 elements in 12 groups
f/22 - 36
Lens construction:
Minimum aperture:
Closest focusing distance*: At 18mm focal length: 0.49 m / 1.61 ft.
(327 x 503 mm / 12.9 x 19.8 in. field of view)
At 135mm focal length: 0.45 m / 1.48 ft.
(75 x 112 mm / 3.0 x 4.4 in. field of view)
* Distance from image sensor plane
Max. magnification:
Image Stabilizer:
Filter size:
0.21x (at 135mm)
Lens shift type
67 mm
Lens cap:
E-67
Max. diameter x length: Approx. 101 mm / 3.0 x 4.0 in.
Weight:
Hood:
Case:
Aprox. 45/ 16.0 oz.
EW-73B (sold separately)
LP1116 (sold separately)
All the data above is based on Canon’s testing standards and CIPA (Camera &
Imaging Products Association) testing standards and guidelines.
Dimensions, maximum diameter, length and weight listed above are based on
CIPA Guidelines (except weight for camera body only).
Product specifications and the exterior are subject to change without notice.
If a problem occurs with a non-Canon lens attached to the camera, consult the
respective lens maker.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
295
Trademarks
Adobe is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
Windows is a trademark or registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and other countries.
Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks or registered trademarks of Apple Inc.
in the United States and other countries.
SDXC logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
HDMI, HDMI logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are a trademark or
registered trademark of HDMI Licensing LLC.
All other corporate and product names and trademarks mentioned in this
manual are the property of their respective owners.
About MPEG-4 Licensing
“This product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MEG-4 standard and may be
used for encoding MPEG-4 compliant video anr decding MPEG-4 compliant video
that was encoded only (1) for a personal and ommrcial purpose or (2) by a
video provider licensed under the AT&nts o provide MPEG-4 compliant video.
No license is granted or implied for anuse for MPEG-4 standard.”
* Notice displayed in English arequired
Use of genuine Canon accessories is recommended
This product is designed to achieve excellent performance when used with
genuine Canon accessories. Canon shall not be liable for any damage to this
product and/or accidents such as fire, etc., caused by the malfunction of non-
genuine Canon accessories (e.g., a leakage and/or explosion of a battery
pack). Please note that this warranty does not apply to repairs arising out of the
malfunction of non-genuine Canon accessories, although you may request
such repairs on a chargeable basis.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
296
Safety Warnings
Follow these safeguards and use the equipment properly to prevent injury, death,
and material damage.
Preventing Serious Injury or Death
• To prevent fire, excessive heat, chemical leakage, and explosions, follow the
safeguards below:
- Do not use any batteries, power sources, and accessories not specified in this
booklet. Do not use any home-made or modified batteries.
- Do not short-circuit, disassemble, or modify the battery pack or back-up battery. Do
not apply heat or apply solder to the battery pack or back-up battery. Do not expose
the battery pack or back-up battery to fire or water. And do not subject the battery
pack or back-up battery to strong physical shock.
- Do not install the battery pack or back-up battery in reversed polarity (+ –). Do not
mix new and old or different types of batteries.
- Do not recharge the battery pack outside the allowable ambient temperature range
of 0°C - 40°C (32°F - 104°F). Also, do not exceed the recharging time.
- Do not insert any foreign metallic objects into the electrical contacts of the camera,
accessories, connecting cables, etc.
• Keep the back-up battery away from children. If a ild swallows the battery, consult a
physician immediately. (Battery chemicaharm the stomach and intestines.)
• When disposing of a battery pack ck-battery, insulate the electrical contacts
with tape to prevent contact with etac objects or batteries. This is to prevent
fire or an explosion.
• If excessive heat, smoke, fumes are emitted during battery pack recharging,
immediately unplug the battry carger from the power outlet to stop the recharging
and prevent a fire.
• If the battery pack or back-up battery leaks, changes color, deforms, or emits smoke or
fumes, remove it immediately. Be careful not to get burned in the process.
• Prevent any battery leakage from contacting your eyes, skin, and clothing. It can
cause blindness or skin problems. If the battery leakage contacts your eyes, skin, or
clothing, flush the affected area with lots of clean water without rubbing it. See a
physician immediately.
• During the recharging, keep the equipment away from the reach of children. The cord
can accidentally choke the child or give an electrical shock.
• Do not leave any cords near a heat source. It can deform the cord or melt the
insulation and cause a fire or electrical shock.
• Do not fire the flash at someone driving a car. It may cause an accident.
• Do not fire the flash near a person’s eyes. It may impair the person’s vision. When
using flash to photograph an infant, keep at least 1 meter away.
• Before storing the camera or accessory when not in use, remove the battery pack and
disconnect the power plug. This is to prevent electrical shock, heat generation, and
fire.
• Do not use the equipment where there is flammable gas. This is to prevent an
explosion or fire.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
297
• If you drop the equipment and the casing breaks open to expose the internal parts, do
not touch the internal parts due to the possibility of electrical shock.
• Do not disassemble or modify the equipment. High-voltage internal parts can cause
electrical shock.
• Do not look at the sun or an extremely bright light source through the camera or lens.
Doing so may damage your vision.
• Keep the camera from the reach of small children. The neck strap can accidentally
choke the child.
• Do not store the equipment in dusty or humid places. This is to prevent fire and
electrical shock.
• Before using the camera inside an airplane or hospital, check if it is allowed.
Electromagnetic waves emitted by the camera may interfere with the plane’s
instruments or the hospital’s medical equipment.
• To prevent fire and electrical shock, follow the safeguards below:
- Always insert the power plug all the way in.
- Do not handle a power plug with wet hands.
- When unplugging a power plug, grasp and pull the plug instead of the cord.
- Do not scratch, cut, or excessively bend the cord or ut a heavy object on the cord.
Also do not twist or tie the cords.
- Do not connect too many power plugs to the me pwer outlet.
- Do not use a cord whose insulation has bemage.
• Occasionally unplug the power plug aa y cloth to clean off the dust around
the power outlet. If the surrounding is umi, or oily, the dust on the power outlet
may become moist and short-rcuit the to cause a fire.
Preventing Injury or Equipment Damage
• Do not leave equipment inside a car under the hot sun or near a heat source. The
equipment may become hot and cause skin burns.
• Do not carry the camera around while it is attached to a tripod. Doing so may cause
injury. Also make sure the tripod is sturdy enough to support the camera and lens.
• Do not leave a lens or lens-attached camera under the sun without the lens cap
attached. Otherwise, the lens may concentrate the sun’s rays and cause a fire.
• Do not cover or wrap the battery-recharging apparatus with a cloth. Doing so may trap
heat within and cause the casing to deform or catch fire.
• If you drop the camera in water or if water or metal fragments enter inside the camera,
promptly remove the battery pack and back-up battery. This is to prevent fire and
electrical shock.
• Do not use or leave the battery pack or back-up battery in a hot environment. Doing so
may cause battery leakage or a shorter battery life. The battery pack or back-up
battery can also become hot and cause skin burns.
• Do not use paint thinner, benzene, or other organic solvents to clean the equipment.
Doing so may cause fire or a health hazard.
If the product does not work properly or requires repair, contact
your dealer or your nearest Canon Service Center.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
298
Digital Camera Model DS126311 Systems
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for
class B digital devices, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These
limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses
and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to
radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference
will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause
harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be
determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged
to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following
measures:
— Reorient or relocate the receiving antena.
— Increase the separation between the uipment and receiver.
— Connect the equipment into alet on a circuit different from
that to which the receiver is cocted.
—
Consult the dealer or arieced radio/TV technician for help.
The cable with the ferrite core prwith the digital camera must be used
with this equipment in orer to comy with Class B limits in Subpart B of Part
15 of the FCC rules.
Do not make any changes or modifications to the equipment unless otherwise
specified in the manual. If such changes or modifications should be made, you
could be required to stop operation of the equipment.
Canon U.S.A. Inc.
One Canon Plaza, Lake Success, NY 11042, U.S.A.
Tel No. (516)328-5600
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
When connecting to and using a household power outlet, use only AC
Adapter Kit ACK-E8 (rated input: 100-240 V AC 50/60 Hz, rated output:
7.4 V DC). Using anything else can cause fire, overheating, or
electrical shock.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
299
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
1. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS — This manual contains important safety
and operating instructions for Battery Charger LC-E8 & LC-E8E.
2. Before using the charger, read all instructions and cautionary remarks on
(1) the charger, (2) the battery pack, and (3) the product using the battery
pack.
3. CAUTION — To reduce risk of injury, charge only the Battery Pack LP-E8.
Other types of batteries may burst, causing personal injury and other
damage.
4. Do not expose the charger to rain or snow.
5. Use of an attachment not recommended or sold by Canon may result in
fire, electric shock, or personal injury.
6. To reduce risk of damage to electric plug and cord, pull by plug rather than
by cord when disconnecting charger.
7. Make sure cord is located so that it will not be stepped on, tripped over, or
otherwise subjected to damage or stress.
8. Do not operate the charger with damaged cord or plug - replace them
immediately.
9. Do not operate the charger if it has received a sharp blow, been dropped,
or otherwise damaged in any way; take it to a qalified serviceman.
10. Do not disassemble the charger; take it to a quified serviceman when
service or repair is required. Incorrect emblmay result in a risk of
electric shock or fire.
11. To reduce risk of electric shock, g carger from outlet before
attempting any maintenance or g.
MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTON
Unless otherwise stated in this maual, there are no user serviceable parts
inside. Refer servicing to qualified serviceman.
USA and Canada only:
The Lithium ion/polymer battery that powers the product is
recyclable. Please call 1-800-8-BATTERY for information on
how to recycle this battery.
For CA, USA only
Included lithium battery contains Perchlorate Material – special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/ for details.
CAUTION
RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE.
DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO LOCAL REGULATION.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
300
Software Start Guide
This chapter gives an overview the oftware in the
EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk (CDOM) provided with
the camera and explains ho install the software in a
personal computer. Ialso ains how to view the pdf
files in the Software Instruction Manual CD-ROM.
EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk
Software Instruction Manual
(Software)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
301
Software Start Guide
EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk
This disk contains various software for EOS DIGITAL
cameras.
EOS Utility
With the camera connected to a personal computer, EOS Utility enables
you to transfer still photos and movies shot with the camera to the
computer. You can also use the personal computer to set various
camera settings and shoot remotely with the computer connected to the
camera. Also, you can copy background music tracks, such as EOS
Sample Music*, to the card.
* Five original background music tracks provided by Canon. Use EOS Utility to
copy the background music tracks to the card, and you can play the
background music during playback of visnashot albums, movies, and
slide shows with the camera.
Digital Photo Professonal
This software is recommended or users who mainly shoot RAW
images. You can view, edit, process, and print RAW images at high
speed. You can also edit JPEG images while retaining the original
images.
ZoomBrowser EX (Win) / ImageBrowser (Mac)
This software is recommended for users who mainly shoot JPEG
images. You can easily view, edit, organize, and print JPEG images.
You can also play and edit movies (MOV files) and video snapshot
albums and extract still photos from movies.
Picture Style Editor
You can edit Picture Styles and create and save original Picture Style
files. This software is aimed at advanced users who are experienced in
processing images.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
302
Software Start Guide
Installing the Software
Do not connect the camera to your computer before you install the
software. The software will not be installed correctly.
Even if a previous version of the software is installed, install the software
by following the steps below (the newer version will overwrite the
previous version).
1
Insert EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk (CD-ROM).
For Macintosh, double-click to open the CD-ROM icon displayed
on the desktop, then double-click on [Canon EOS Digital
Installer].
2 Click [Easy Installation] and follow the on-screen
instructions to install.
For Macintosh, click [Install].
3 Click [Restart] and remove the CD-ROM after the
computer restarts.
When the computer has restarted, the installation is complete.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
303
Software Start Guide
Software Instruction Manual
Contains the Software Instruction Manuals.
Copying and Viewing the Instruction Manual PDFs
1 Insert the [Software INSTRUCTION MANUAL] CD-ROM
into your computer.
2 Double-click the CD-ROM icon.
For Windows, the icon is displayed in [(My) Computer].
For Macintosh, the icon is displayed on the desktop.
3 Copy the [English] folder to your cmputer.
Instruction Manual PDFs with the amebelow are copied.
ndos
Macintosh
EUx.xM_E_xx
DPPx.xM_E_xx
EOS Utility
W_E_xx
DPPx.xW_E_xx
Digital Photo Professional
ZoomBrowser EX /
ImageBrowser
ZBx.xW_E_xx
IBx.xM_E_xx
Picture Style Editor
PSEx.xW_E_xx
PSEx.xM_E_xx
4 Double-click the copied PDF file.
Adobe Reader (Version 6.0 or later) must be installed in your
computer.
Adobe Reader can be downloaded free from the Internet.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
304
Quick Reference Guide and
Instruction Manual Index
Menu Operations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.306
Image-recording Quality - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.307
A Picture Style- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.307
QQuick Control Sceen - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.308
Nomenclature - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.309
Basic Zone Modes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.311
D Using the Built-in Flash- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.311
Creative Zone Modes- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.312
d: Program AE - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.312
s: Shutter-priority AE - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.312
f: Aperture-priority AE- - - - - - - - - - - - - p.312
E: AF Mode- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.313
S AF Point - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.313
Z: ISO Speed - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.314
i Drive Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.314
ALive View Shooting- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.315
kShooting Movies - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.316
Image Playback- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - p.317
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
305
Quick Reference Guide
Menu Operations
<M>
button
<0> button
LCD
monitor
<S>
Cross keys
1. Press the <M> button to display the menu.
2. Press the <U> key to select a tab, then press the <V>
key to select the desired item.
3. Press <0> to display the setting.
4. After setting the item, press <0>
Basic Zone Modes
vie Shooting Mode
Creative Zone
Modes
Tabs
Menu items Menu settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
306
Quick Reference Guide
Image-recording Quality
ꢀ Select [1Quality], then press <0>.
ꢀ Press the <U> key to select the quality, then press <0>.
Image-recording quality
Recorded pixels
Possible shots
APicture StyleN
ꢀ Prethe <A> button.
ss the <U> key to select the
ture Style, then press <0>.
Style
DAuto
PStandard
QPortrait
Description
Color tones optimized for the particular scene.
Vivid colors and sharp images.
Nice skin tones and slightly sharp images.
RLandscape Vivid blue skies and greenery and very sharp images.
V
Monochrome Black-and-white images.
ꢀ For <S> (Neutral) and <U> (Faithful), see page 82.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
307
Quick Reference Guide
Q Quick Control
ꢀ Press the <Q> button.
ꢀ The Quick Control screen will
appear.
Basic Zone Modes
Creative Zone Modes
Aperture
Shutter speed
Shooting mode
Highlight tone priority
ISO speed
Flash exposure
compensation
Auto Lighting
Optimizer
Exposure
compensation/
AEB setting
Picture Style
AF mode
Built-in flash function
White
Image-recording
quality
balance
Drive mode
Metering mode
ꢀ In Basic Zone modes, the settable functions differ depending
on the shooting mode.
ꢀ Press the <S> key to select a function, then turn the <6>
dial to set it.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
308
Quick Reference Guide
Nomenclature
Power switch
Mode Dial
<Z> ISO speed
<D> Flash
setting button
button
<6>
Main Dial
Shutter
button
Focus mode switch
<A> Live View shooting/
<A> AE lock button
Movie shooting button
<S> AF point
selection button
<S>
Cross keys
Access lamp
<O> Aperture/Exposure
compensation button
<0> Setting button
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
309
Quick Reference Guide
Shooting Settings Display
Shutter speed
Shooting mode
Aperture
ISO speed
Exposure level
indicator
Auto Lighting
Optimizer
White balance
Picture Style
Built-in flash
func. setting
AF mode
Image-recording
quality
Quick Control
icon
Possible shots
Meteing mode
Drode
Battery check
zxcn
OK
NG
Viewfinder Information
AF point activation indicator <•>
Spot metering
circle
AF points
Focus
AE lock
confirmation light
Flash-ready
Flash exposure
compensation
Max. burst
Monochrome shooting
ISO speed
Shutter speed
Aperture
Exposure level indicator
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
310
Quick Reference Guide
Basic Zone Modes
All the settings necessary for
shooting are set automatically. You
just press the shutter button, and
the camera does the rest.
o
A
7
C
2
Scene Intelligent Auto
Flash Off
Creative Auto
Portrait
3
4
5
6
Landscape
Close-up
Sports
Night Portrait
ꢀ
Pressing the <Q> button will display te Quick Control screen.
In the C/2/3/4/5/6shoting mode, press the <V>
key to select the function, then ess the <U> key or turn
the <6> dial to set it aired.
D Using the Built-in Flash
Basic Zone Modes
If necessary, the built-in flash will pop-up automatically in
low-light or backlit conditions (except in the <7> <3> <5>
modes).
Creative Zone Modes
ꢀ Press the <D> button to raise the
built-in flash, then shoot.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
311
Quick Reference Guide
Creative Zone Modes
You can change the camera
settings as desired to shoot in
various ways.
d: Program AE
The camera automatically sets the shutter speed and
aperture in the same way as the <A> mode.
ꢀ Set the Mode Dial to <d>.
s: Shutter-priority AE
ꢀ Set thode Dial to <s>.
ꢀ
he
6
>
dial to set the
dshutter speed, then focus the
subject.
ꢀ
ꢀ
The aperture will be set automatically.
If the aperture display blinks, turn the
<6> dial until it stops blinking.
f: Aperture-priority AE
ꢀ Set the Mode Dial to <f>.
ꢀ
Turn the
<
6
>
dial to set the desired
aperture, then focus the subject.
ꢀ The shutter speed will be set
automatically.
ꢀ
If the shutter speed display blinks, turn
the <
6
>
dial until it stops blinking.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
312
Quick Reference Guide
E: AF ModeN
ꢀ Set the lens focus mode switch
to <f>.
ꢀ Press the <ZE> button.
ꢀ Press the <U> key or turn the
<6> dial to select the AF
mode, then press <0>.
X(One-Shot AF):
For still subjects
9(AI Focus AF):
Switches the AF mode
automatically
Z(I Servo AF):
Foving subjects
S AF PointN
ss the <S> button.
ꢀ Press the <S> key to select the
AF point.
ꢀ While looking through the
viewfinder, you can select the
AF point by turning the <6>
dial until the desired AF point
flashes in red.
ꢀ Pressing <0> toggles the AF
point selection between the
center AF point and automatic
AF point selection.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
313
Quick Reference Guide
Z: ISO SpeedN
ꢀ Press the <Z> button.
ꢀ Press the <U> key or turn the
<6> dial to select the ISO
speed, then press <0>.
ꢀ When [AUTO] is selected, the
ISO speed is set automatically.
When you press the shutter
button halfway, the ISO speed
setting will be displayed.
iDrive ModeN
ꢀ the <YiQ> button.
ꢀ Press the <U> key or turn the
<6> dial to select the drive
mode, then press <0>.
u : Single shooting
i : Continuous shooting
Q: Self-timer:10 sec/Remote
control*
l: Self-timer:2 sec
q: Self-timer:Continuous*
* The <Q> and <q> drive
modes can be selected in all
shooting modes (except <k>).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
314
Quick Reference Guide
A Live View Shooting
ꢀ Press the <A> button to display
the Live View image.
ꢀ Press the shutter button halfway
to focus.
esthe shutter button
mpletely to take the picture.
ꢀ Live View shooting settings will appear under the [2] menu
tab in Basic Zone modes and under the [z] menu tab in
Creative Zone modes.
ꢀ Battery Life with Live View Shooting
Temperature
No Flash
50% Flash Use
At 23°C / 73°F
Approx. 200 shots
Approx. 180 shots
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
315
Quick Reference Guide
k Shooting Movies
ꢀ Set the Mode Dial to <k>.
ꢀ Press the shutter button
halfway to focus.
ꢀ Press the <A> button to start
shooting a mvie.
ꢀ To stomovie shooting, press
A> button again.
Recording movie
Microphone
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
316
Quick Reference Guide
Image Playback
y
u
y
u
Index
Magnify
S
Select image
x
Playback
L
Erase
Shooting information
C
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
317
Index
10-sec. or 2-sec. delay ...................89
1280x720......................................150
1920x1080....................................150
1st-curtain sync.............................182
2nd-curtain sync ...........................182
4- or 9-image index display...........202
640x480........................................150
9-point AF auto selection................85
Background music........................ 217
Basic Zone modes ......................... 22
Bass boost ................................... 213
Battery................................ 26, 28, 33
Battery check ................................. 33
Battery Grip............................ 33, 276
Beeper.......................................... 166
Black-and-white image..... 65, 82, 114
Bracketing ............................ 105, 120
A
Brightness (exposure).................. 103
Adjust
(exposure compensation) ........ 103
Auto exposure bracketing
AC Adapter Kit..............................260
Access lamp ...................................30
Accessories ......................................3
(AEB) ............................... 105, 252
Autoexposure lock (AE lock).... 107
Measement method
A-DEP
(Automatic Depth-of-Field AE)......101
Adobe RGB...................................121
AE lock..........................................107
AEB.......................................105, 252
AF (Focusing) ...........................83, 8
AF point .........................................85
AI FOCUS (AI Focus AF)...............84
AI SERVO (AI Servo AF)................84
AI Servo AF ..............................53, 84
Aperture-priority AE ........................96
Aspect ratio...................................129
Audio/video OUT ..................210, 221
Auto Lighting Optimizer ..........49, 109
Auto playback ...............................215
Auto power off.........................32, 167
Auto reset .....................................171
Auto rotate of vertical images .......174
Autofocus..................................83, 85
Automatic selection of AF point ......85
Av (Aperture-priority AE).................96
A/V OUT ...............................210, 221
(Meteng mode) ...................... 102
n flah.................................... 90
BB (Bulb exposure) ................. 100
C
C(Creative Auto)......................... 56
Cable................ 3, 218, 221, 236, 277
Camera
Camera shake ......................... 122
Clear camera settings.............. 176
Holding the camera.................... 39
Settings display........................ 175
Camera shake.......................... 38, 39
Card ................................... 15, 29, 45
Card reminder.......................... 166
Eye-Fi ...................................... 265
Format ....................................... 45
Problem ............................... 30, 46
SD speed class........................ 141
SDHC/SDXC.............................. 29
Write-protect .............................. 29
Center-weighted average
metering ....................................... 102
B
Charger .................................... 24, 26
B/W (Monochrome).................82, 114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
318
Index
Cleaning (Image sensor).......184, 187
Clear camera settings...................176
Close-ups........................................61
Eyecup ......................................... 262
Eye-Fi card................................... 265
Eyepiece cover....................... 25, 262
Color space
(color reproduction range).............121
F
Faithful............................................ 82
FE lock ......................................... 108
Feature guide ................................. 48
FEB .............................................. 181
File name...................................... 170
File size .......................... 76, 151, 226
Filter effect............................ 114, 230
Final image simulation.......... 127, 147
Fine (Image-recording quality) ....... 76
Firmware Ver. ............................... 272
Fish-ye effect.............................. 232
Color temperature.........................117
Color tone .....................................113
Continuous....................................170
Continuous shooting .......................88
Contrast ........................................113
Copyright information....................172
Creative Auto ..................................56
Creative filters...............................230
Micon..............................................4
Creative Zone modes......................22
Custom Functions.........................250
Custom WB...................................117
lash
Builtn flash ............................... 90
Custom Functions.................... 183
Effective range........................... 90
External Speedlite.................... 263
FE lock..................................... 108
Flash control ............................ 180
Flash exposure
compensation........................... 104
Flash off ......................... 55, 58, 64
Flash-sync speed............. 252, 264
Manual flash..................... 182, 199
Red-eye reduction...................... 91
Shutter sync.
D
Date/Time ...................................
DC coupler..................................260
Depth-of-field preview.....................98
Dial............................................18, 93
Digital terminal ......................221, 236
Dioptric adjustment .........................39
Direct printing................................235
DPOF............................................245
Drive mode..........................20, 58, 88
Dust Delete Data...........................185
(1st/2nd curtain)....................... 182
Wireless ................................... 189
E
Flash exposure compensation ..... 104
Flash mode................................... 182
Flash-sync contacts........................ 18
Focus confirmation light ................. 50
Focus lock ...................................... 53
Focus mode switch........... 36, 87, 138
Erase (image) ...............................224
Error codes ...................................287
Evaluative metering ......................102
Exposure compensation ...............103
Exposure level increments............252
Extension ......................................171
External Speedlite.........................263
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
319
Index
Focusing
AF mode.....................................83
I
ICC profile .................................... 121
AF point selection.......................85
AF-assist beam ..................86, 255
Beeper......................................166
Difficult-to-focus subjects....87, 135
Manual focusing .................87, 138
Out of focus............38, 39, 87, 135
Recompose ................................53
Image
Auto playback .......................... 215
Auto rotate ............................... 174
Erase ....................................... 224
Highlight alert........................... 228
Histogram ................................ 228
Image characteristics
(Picture Style) ............ 81, 112, 115
Index........................................ 202
Jump display
(Image browsing)..................... 203
Magnified view......................... 204
Manual rotate........................... 205
No. ........................................... 170
Playbck ............................ 71, 201
Protec..................................... 222
view ime ............................. 166
ooting information................ 226
ransfer.................................... 265
View on TV ...................... 210, 218
Folder Create/Select.....................168
Format ............................................45
Format (card initialization) ..............45
Frame rate ....................................150
Full Auto (Scene Intelligent Auto) ...50
Full High-Definition
(Full HD) ...............................150, 210
Function availability table..............268
G
Grainy B/W ...................................23
Grid display...........................129, 16
Image area..................................... 37
Image dust prevention.. 184, 185, 187
Image review time........................ 166
Image Stabilizer (lens).................... 38
Image Zone.................................... 22
Image-recording quality.................. 76
Index display ................................ 202
H
HDMI.....................................210, 218
HDMI CEC....................................219
High ISO speed noise reduction...254
High-Definition (HD)..............150, 210
Highlight alert................................228
Highlight tone priority............159, 254
Histogram (Brightness/RGB) ........228
Hot shoe .......................................263
Household power..........................260
ISO speed ...................................... 79
Auto ........................................... 80
ISO expansion ......................... 252
Maximum ISO speed with
ISO Auto .................................... 80
J
JPEG.............................................. 76
Jump display ................................ 203
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
320
Index
Manual selection (AF) .................... 85
Maximum burst......................... 76, 77
L
Landscape ................................60, 82
Language selection.........................35
Large (Image-recording quality)......76
Medium (Image-recording
quality).................................... 76, 234
Memory card ...................... 15, 29, 45
LCD monitor....................................15
Brightness adjustment..............167
Image playback ..................71, 201
Menu screen.......................43, 270
Screen color .............................179
Shooting settings display......20, 47
Vari-Angle.............................31, 54
Menu .............................................. 43
My Menu .................................. 258
Setting procedure....................... 44
Settings.................................... 270
3 icon......................................... 4
Metering mode ............................. 102
Metering timer ...................... 130, 161
MF (Manual focusing)............. 87, 138
Microphone................................... 142
Miniature effect............................. 232
Mirrolockup......................... 122, 255
Mode Dial ....................................... 22
onochrome .................... 65, 82, 114
Lens ..........................................23, 36
Image Stabilizer..........................38
Lock release ...............................37
Peripheral illumination
correction..................................110
Live View shooting..................54, 123
Aspect ratio...............................129
Face detection Live mode
(AF).........................................
Grid display.............................
Information display .................1
Live mode (AF).....................131
Manual focusing .................87, 138
Metering timer...........................130
Possible shots ..........................125
Quick Control............................128
Quick mode (AF) ......................136
Movie............................................ 141
AF mode .......................... 149, 157
Autoexposure........................... 142
Editing out first and last
scenes...................................... 214
Enjoying ................................... 210
File size.................................... 151
Frame rate ............................... 150
Grid display.............................. 161
Information display................... 146
Manual exposure ..................... 144
Manual focusing....................... 142
Metering timer.......................... 161
Movie digital zoom ................... 152
Movie recording size................ 150
Playback .................................. 212
Quick Control ........................... 149
Recording time......................... 151
Sound recording....................... 160
Still photo shooting................... 148
Video snapshots....................... 153
Video snapshots album............ 153
View on TV....................... 210, 218
Long exposure noise reduction.....253
Long exposures ............................100
Low-level format..............................46
M
M (Manual exposure)......................99
Macro photography.........................61
Magnified view ......................138, 204
Malfunction....................................278
Manual exposure ....................99, 144
Manual focus (MF)..................87, 138
Manual reset .................................171
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
321
Index
My Menu.......................................258
Pressing halfway............................ 40
Printing......................................... 235
Layout...................................... 239
Paper settings.......................... 238
Print Order (DPOF).................. 245
Printing effects ......................... 240
Tilt correction ........................... 243
Trimming.................................. 243
N
Neutral ............................................82
Night Portrait...................................63
Night scene...............................60, 63
No. ................................................170
Noise reduction
High ISO speed........................254
Long exposures........................253
Program AE.................................... 74
Program shift.................................. 75
Protect (image erase-protection).. 222
Nomenclature .................................18
Non-Canon flash units ..................264
Normal (Image-recording quality) ...76
NTSC....................................150, 272
Q
Q(Quick Control) ........... 41, 64, 208
Quick mode (AF).......................... 136
O
R
ONE SHOT (One-Shot AF).............83
Rating...................................... 206
g mak.................................. 206
RW......................................... 76, 78
AW+JPEG ............................. 76, 78
Recharge........................................ 26
Red-eye reduction.......................... 91
Release shutter without card........ 166
Remote control shooting .............. 261
Remote switch.............................. 262
Resize .......................................... 233
Revert to default settings ............. 176
Rotate (image) ............. 174, 205, 243
P
P (Program AE) ..............................7
PAL .......................................150, 27
Paper settings (printing)..............238
Partial metering...........................12
Peripheral illumination
correction......................................110
Personal white balance.................118
PictBridge .....................................235
Picture Style....................81, 112, 115
Pixels ..............................................76
Playback .................................71, 201
Portrait ......................................59, 81
Possible shots...................33, 76, 125
S
Safety warnings............................ 297
Saturation..................................... 113
SD card .................................... 29, 45
SDHC and SDXC cards ........... 29, 45
Self-timer.................................. 64, 89
Sensor cleaning ................... 184, 187
Sepia (Monochrome).............. 65, 114
Sharpness.................................... 113
Power
Auto power off ..........................167
Battery check..............................33
Household power .....................260
Possible shots ..............33, 76, 125
Recharge....................................26
Predictive (AI Servo).......................84
Pressing completely........................40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
322
Index
Shoot by ambience selection..........65
Shoot by lighting or scene type.......68
Shooting information display.........226
T
Temperature warning............ 139, 163
Tone priority.......................... 159, 254
Toning effect (Monochrome)......... 114
Toy camera effect......................... 232
Trimming (printing) ....................... 243
Tripod socket.................................. 19
Tv (Shutter-priority AE)................... 94
Shooting mode................................22
A-DEP
(Automatic Depth-of-Field AE)..101
Av (Aperture-priority AE) ............96
M (Manual exposure)..................99
P (Program AE) ..........................74
Tv (Shutter-priority AE)...............94
A (Scene Intelligent Auto) .......50
7 (Flash Off).............................55
C(Creative Auto) .....................56
2 (Portrait) ................................59
3 (Landscape) .........................60
4 (Close-up)..............................61
5 (Sports).................................62
6 (Night Portrait).......................63
k(Movie shooting).................141
U
USB (Digital) terminal................... 236
V
Vari-Angle LCD monitor............ 31, 54
Video snapshot............................. 153
Video snapshot album.................. 153
Videsystem................ 150, 221, 272
ew oTV........................... 210, 218
Shooting settings display ..........20, 7
Shutter button .............................
Shutter sync................................
Shutter-priority AE........................94
Single image display.......................71
Single shooting .......................58, 269
Single-point AF ...............................85
Slide show.....................................215
Viewfinder....................................... 21
Dioptric adjustment .................... 39
Volume (Movie playback) ............. 213
W
WB (White balance) ..................... 117
White balance............................... 117
Bracketing................................ 120
Correction ................................ 119
Custom..................................... 117
Personal................................... 118
Small (Image-recording
quality) ....................................76, 234
Soft focus......................................232
Software....................................3, 301
Speaker.........................................212
Sports..............................................62
Spot metering................................102
sRGB ............................................121
Stopped-down aperture ..................98
Strap ...............................................25
System map..................................276
Wind filter ..................................... 161
Wireless flash shooting ................ 189
Custom wireless shooting........ 194
Easy wireless shooting ............ 191
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
323
CANON INC. 30-2, Shimomaruko 3-chome, Ohta-ku, Tokyo 146-8501, Japan
U.S.A.
CANON U.S.A. INC.
One Canon Plaza, Lake Success, NY 11042-1198, U.S.A.
For all inquires concerning this product, call toll free in the U.S.
1-800-OK-CANON
CANADA
CANON CANADA INC. HEADQUARTERS
6390 Dixie Road, Mississauga, Ontario L5T 1P7, Canada
CANON CANADA INC. MONTREAL BRANCH
5990, Côte-de-Liesse, Montréal Québec H4T 1V7, Canada
CANON CANADA INC. CALGARY OFFICE
2828, 16th Street, N.E. Calgary, Alberta T2E 7K7, Canada
For all inquiries concerning this product, call toll free in Canada
1-800-OK-CANON
EUROPE,
CANON EUROPA N.V.
AFRICA &
Bovenkerkerweg 59-61, 1185 XB Amstelveen, The Netherlands
CANON FRANCE S.A.S.
MIDDLE EAST
17,Quai du Président Paul Doumer, 92414 Courbevoie Cedex, France
CANON UK LTD.
Woodhatch Reigate,Surrey RH2 8BF, United Kingdom
CANON DEUTSCHLAND GmbH
Europark Fichtenhain A10, 47807 Krefeld, Germany
CANON ITALIA S.p.A.
Via Milano 8, 20097 San Donato Milanese, (MI), ly
CANON Schweiz A.G.
Industriestrasse 12, 8305 Dietlikon, and
Canon GmbH
Zetschegasse 11, A-1230 Vustr
CANON España,S.A.
Av. De Europa,6 Alobendas adrid, Spain
CANON Portuga.A.
Rua Alfredo da Silv,14 Alfgide 2610-016 Amadora, Portugal
CENTRAL &
CANON LATIN AMERICA, INC.
SOUTH AMERICA 703 Waterford Way, Suite 400 Miami, FL 33126,U.S.A.
ASIA
CANON (China) Co., LTD.
15F Jinbao Building No.89 Jinbao Street, Dongcheng District, Beijing 100005, China
CANON HONGKONG CO., LTD.
19/F., The Metropolis Tower, 10 Metropolis Drive, Hunghom, Kowloon, Hong Kong
CANON SINGAPORE PTE. LTD.
1 HarbourFront Avenue, #04-01 Keppel Bay Tower, Singapore 098632
CANON KOREA CONSUMER IMAGING INC.
Canon BS Tower 5F, #168-12 Samseong-dong, Gangnam-gu, Seoul, Korea
OCEANIA
JAPAN
CANON AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.
1 Thomas Holt Drive, North Ryde, Sydney N.S.W. 2113, Australia
CANON NEW ZEALAND LTD.
Akoranga Business Park, Akoranga Drive, Northcote, Auckland, New Zealand
CANON MARKETING JAPAN INC.
16-6, Kohnan 2-chome, Minato-ku, Tokyo 108-8011, Japan
This Instruction Manual booklet is current as of January 2011. For information on
the camera’s compatibility with any accessories and lenses introduced after this
date, contact any Canon Service Center.
CPH-E001-001
© CANON INC. 2012
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|